Enterprise Manual 1c

1:Enterprise 8.
User Manual
Second edition
User Manual
ENTIRE COPYRIGHT TO SOFTWARE

AND DOCUMENTATION BELONGS TO 1C Company
By purchasing 1:Enterprise software system
you hereby agree to protect rights of 1C Company
and refrain from making copies of the software
and documentation without prior written permission from 1C Company.
1C, LLC, 19962012

1C Company, Moscow, 123056, P.O. 64
Sales Department: 21, Seleznevskaya st.,
Phone: +7 (495) 737-92-57,
Fax: +7 (495) 681-44-07,
E-mail: int@1c.ru
URL: www.1c.ru/eng, www.1c-dn.com
Software Development Group: A. Alekseev, A. Bezborodov, D. Beskorovainov, P. Vasilets,
A. Vinogradov, A. Volkov, N. Evgrafov, I. Golshtein, E. Gornostayev, G. Damie,
O. Derut, D. Zaretsky, D. Ivashov, S. Kopienko, N. Korsakov, S. Kravtchenko, A. Lakutin,
M.Leybovitch, G.Leontyev, A.Lekhan, A.Medvedev, E.Mitroshkin, S.Murzin, S.Nuraliev,
M. Otstavnov, D. Pavlenko, A. Plyakin, A. Rukin, D. Rusanov, D. Sluzhbin, A. Smirnov,
P. Solodky, V. Sosnovsky, A. Toporkov, V. Tunegov, V. Philippov, V. Cheremisinov,
P.Chikov, A.Chicherin, A.Shevtchenko.
Documentation: V.Baidakov, V.Dranishchev, E.Korolkova, A.Krayushkin, I.Kuznetsov, M.Lavrov,
A.Monichev, A.Plyakin, M.Radchenko.
Technical Support Group: O. Akulova, S. Alekseeva, O. Bagrova, O. Baklushina, A. Garifullina,
V. Davydova, O. Dmitryenko, L. Ermakova, M. Ershova, U. Zhestkov, O. Zavalskaya,
N.Zayavlina, M.Zvonilov, M.Ivanova, G.Korobka, U.Lavrova, S.Lepeshkina, S.Mazurin,
S. Markov, J. Misan, A. Pavlikov, I. Panin, O. Pekhtereva, S. Postnova, A. Prokurovsky,
E.Romanova, G.Stepanenko, N.Stepanov, T.Tokareva, E.Shirokova.
QA Group: T. Akulova, A. Andriyanova, E. Antonova, M. Gubko, B. Ziatdinov, A. Kapralova,
S. Karasev, I. Karelin, A. Lapin, E. Litvinenko, E. Medvedev, O. Reader, E. Sitosenko,
E.Smirnova, E.Stetsenko, G.Fadeeva, S.Khrisanova, N.Shargunova.
Book Title:
Publication Number:
Publication Date:
1:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual. Second edition

82.104.02
TECHNICAL SUPPORT LINE

Registered users can receive technical support from 1C Company or authorized
1C partners.
To complete your registration, fill out the registration form and mail it to the
1C partner through which you have purchased the product. The address is printed
on the registration form.
Refer to the software registration card for the telephone number and e-mail address
of the technical support service.
When you dial the hot line, ensure that you are not far from your computer and
you have this guide and your registration card with you. Be prepared to provide
the support representative with the brand and technical specifications of your
computer and printer.
When you dial the hot line, you will be connected with a technical specialist.
Be ready to provide the name of your company, your software version number (it
can be found on the software distribution CD and on your registration card) and
other registration information. The information that you provide will be verified
against the registration form that you sent out.
The technical support specialist might attempt to reproduce your situation on their
computer. They might provide the solution immediately or consult software developers. The log of all support calls is maintained, so when calling about a previous
issue you can refer to the date and time of your previous call.
WE ARE ALWAYS HERE TO HELP YOU!
1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual
Contents
Introduction........................................................................................................................... 13
Structure of the Manual......................................................................................................... 13
What You Need To Know..................................................................................................... 14
Books Included in the Documentation.................................................................................. 15
Text Files Included in the 1C:Enterprise8.2 Distribution Kit........................................... 15

About 1C:Enterprise8 Page.................................................................................................. 16
1C:Enterprise8 Web Site...................................................................................................... 16
1C:Developer Network.......................................................................................................... 16
Chapter 1. About 1C:Enterprise......................................................................................... 17
Chapter 2. Software Installation and Update.................................................................... 19

2.1. Software Installation....................................................................................................... 19
2.1.1. Platform Installation................................................................................................ 20

2.1.2. Selecting Interface Language................................................................................... 23
2.2. Configuration Installation............................................................................................... 23
2.3. Obtaining a License........................................................................................................ 24
Chapter 3. Getting Started................................................................................................... 25

3.1. Application Startup......................................................................................................... 25
3.2. Login.............................................................................................................................. 25
3.2.1. Web Client Startup.................................................................................................. 26

3.2.2. Connection Speed Selection.................................................................................... 26
3.3. Adding an Infobase........................................................................................................ 27
3.3.1. Creating an Infobase................................................................................................ 27
Chapter 4. Software Interface............................................................................................. 31

4.1. Main Window................................................................................................................. 31
4.1.1. Desktop.................................................................................................................... 33
4.1.2. Sections Panel.......................................................................................................... 34
4.1.3. Navigation Panel...................................................................................................... 34
4.1.4. Action Panel............................................................................................................. 35
4.1.5. Information Panel.................................................................................................... 37
4.2. Auxiliary Window.......................................................................................................... 37
4.2.1. Auxiliary Window Navigation................................................................................. 38

4.2.2. Form Command Bar................................................................................................ 38
4.3. General Workflow.......................................................................................................... 39
4.4. Windowing system operation on multiple monitors...................................................... 39
4.5. Working in the Tab Mode.............................................................................................. 40
4.5.1. Tabs.......................................................................................................................... 40
4.6. The Functions Menu....................................................................................................... 42
4.7. Panels Setup................................................................................................................... 43
Chapter 5. Operation in Forms........................................................................................... 45

5.1. General Techniques of Working with Forms................................................................. 45
5.2. Dragging operations....................................................................................................... 46
5.3. Fields.............................................................................................................................. 47
5.3.1. Text Box.................................................................................................................. 47

5.3.2. Check box................................................................................................................ 51
5.3.3. Radio Button............................................................................................................ 51
5.4. Progress Bar................................................................................................................... 52
5.5. Slider ............................................................................................................................. 52
5.6. Hyperlink........................................................................................................................ 52
5.7. Button............................................................................................................................. 52
5.8. Table............................................................................................................................... 53
5.9. Groups............................................................................................................................ 55
5.9.1. Command Bar.......................................................................................................... 55
5.9.2. Pages........................................................................................................................ 56
5.10. Chart............................................................................................................................. 56
5.11. Text Document Field.................................................................................................... 56
5.12. HTML Document Field................................................................................................ 56
5.13. Graphical Schema Field............................................................................................... 57
5.14. Picture Field................................................................................................................. 58
5.15. Spreadsheet Document Field........................................................................................ 58
5.16. The Formatted Document Field................................................................................... 60
5.17. Managing a Form and Saving Settings......................................................................... 62
5.18. Specific Features of Some Forms................................................................................. 63
Chapter 6. Lists..................................................................................................................... 65
6.1. Viewing a List................................................................................................................ 66
6.1.1. Hierarchical Lists..................................................................................................... 66

6.2. Creating a List Item........................................................................................................ 69
6.2.1. Creating a Folder in a List....................................................................................... 70
6.2.2. Copying a List Item................................................................................................. 70
6.3. Editing List Items........................................................................................................... 70
6.3.1. List Rearrangement.................................................................................................. 71
6.3.2. Selecting a Value from a List.................................................................................. 71
6.3.3. Search in Lists.......................................................................................................... 73
6.4. List Customization......................................................................................................... 74
6.4.1. Filter......................................................................................................................... 75
6.4.2. Sorting...................................................................................................................... 75
Contents
6.4.3. Group....................................................................................................................... 76
6.4.4. Conditional Appearance.......................................................................................... 77
6.4.5. Visibility Interval..................................................................................................... 77
6.5. Print List......................................................................................................................... 78
Chapter 7. Management of Various Data Types................................................................ 79

7.1. Item Numbering............................................................................................................. 79
7.2. Adding an Element Based On........................................................................................ 79
7.3. Deleting (Marking for Deletion) an Item (Folder) ........................................................ 80
7.4. Working with Data from External Sources.................................................................... 80
7.5. Print Form of an Object . ............................................................................................... 81
7.6. Multiuser Operation....................................................................................................... 82
7.7. Documents and Document Journals............................................................................... 82
7.7.1. Viewing Document Journal..................................................................................... 83

7.7.2. Adding a New Document from the Document Journal........................................... 83
7.7.3. Document Date and Time........................................................................................ 84
7.7.4. Posting a Document................................................................................................. 84
7.7.5. Unpostable Documents............................................................................................ 85
7.7.6. Viewing Document Register Records...................................................................... 85
7.8. Business Processes......................................................................................................... 86
7.8.1. List of Business Processes....................................................................................... 86
7.8.2. List of Tasks............................................................................................................ 87
7.8.3. Executing a Task...................................................................................................... 88
Chapter 8. Reports................................................................................................................ 89
8.1. Report Setup................................................................................................................... 90
8.2. Report Variants............................................................................................................... 92
8.3. Working with Reports.................................................................................................... 92
8.3.1. Using Quick Settings............................................................................................... 94

8.3.2. Settings.................................................................................................................... 94
8.4. Working with Report Details......................................................................................... 99
Chapter 9. Editing a Report Variant................................................................................ 105

9.1. General Report Customization..................................................................................... 106
9.2. Changing Report Structure........................................................................................... 106
9.2.1. Customization of Report Structure Item................................................................ 109

9.2.2. Setting Elements.................................................................................................... 109
9.3. Selecting Settings Items............................................................................................... 121
Chapter 10. Service Features............................................................................................. 125

10.1. Links........................................................................................................................... 125
10.2. Favorites..................................................................................................................... 126
10.2.1. Favorites Setup.................................................................................................... 127

10.3. History........................................................................................................................ 127
10.4. All Functions.............................................................................................................. 128
10.5. Notifications............................................................................................................... 129
10.6. Messages.................................................................................................................... 129
10.7. Status of a Lengthy Process........................................................................................ 130
10.8. Calculator................................................................................................................... 131

10.8.1. Working with Clipboard...................................................................................... 133
10.9. Calendar...................................................................................................................... 134
10.10. Files Comparison...................................................................................................... 136
10.10.1. Text Files Comparison....................................................................................... 136
10.10.2. Spreadsheet Documents Comparison................................................................ 138
10.11. Error Messages......................................................................................................... 139
Chapter 11. Software Configuration................................................................................. 141
11.1. Interface...................................................................................................................... 141
11.1.1. Desktop................................................................................................................ 141
11.1.2. Sections Panel...................................................................................................... 142
11.1.3. Navigation Panel.................................................................................................. 143
11.1.4. Action Panel......................................................................................................... 144
11.1.5. System Commands Area of the Main and Auxiliary Windows........................... 145
11.2. Form Setup................................................................................................................. 147
11.2.1. Sample Form Setup.............................................................................................. 149
11.3. System Options........................................................................................................... 153
11.4. Window Layout Management.................................................................................... 154
11.4.1. Windows of Text and Spreadsheet Documents................................................... 155
11.4.2. Restoring Window Position................................................................................. 155
Chapter 12. Getting Help................................................................................................... 157
12.1. Help Window............................................................................................................. 157
12.1.1. Viewing Help Information................................................................................... 158
12.1.2. Searching for Help Information........................................................................... 159
12.1.3. Format of Search Expressions............................................................................. 161
12.1.4. Printing Descriptions........................................................................................... 163
12.2. About 1C:Enterprise Window.................................................................................... 163
Chapter 13. Using Web Client........................................................................................... 165
13.1. Web Client Startup..................................................................................................... 165
13.1.1. Web Client Window............................................................................................ 166
13.1.2. Specific Features of Printing................................................................................ 167
13.1.3. Operations with Files........................................................................................... 167
13.2. Specific Features of the Web Client........................................................................... 167
13.2.1. Saving Documents............................................................................................... 167
13.2.2. Operations with Tabs........................................................................................... 168
13.2.3. Operations with Windows................................................................................... 168
13.2.4. Other Specific Features........................................................................................ 168
13.2.5. Working on iPad.................................................................................................. 172
13.3. Microsoft Internet Explorer Setup.............................................................................. 173
13.3.1. File System Extension Setup............................................................................... 174
13.4. Mozilla Firefox Setup................................................................................................. 174
13.4.1. File System Extension Setup............................................................................... 175
13.4.2. Language Settings................................................................................................ 175
13.5. Google Chrome Setup................................................................................................ 176
13.6. Safari Setup................................................................................................................ 177
Contents
Chapter 14. Slow Connection Mode . ............................................................................... 179

Chapter 15. Ordinary Application Mode......................................................................... 181
15.1. Interface...................................................................................................................... 181
15.2. Operations Menu........................................................................................................ 182
15.2.1. List Customization............................................................................................... 182

15.2.2. Reports ................................................................................................................ 187
15.2.3. Report Setup........................................................................................................ 189
15.3. Service Features......................................................................................................... 190
15.3.1. Options Setup....................................................................................................... 190
15.3.2. Toolbars............................................................................................................... 192
15.3.3. Toolbar Types...................................................................................................... 192
15.3.4. Toolbar Management........................................................................................... 193
15.3.5. Temporary Lock.................................................................................................. 194
15.4. Setting User Options.................................................................................................. 195
15.5. Saving Event Log ...................................................................................................... 195
15.6. Window Layout Management.................................................................................... 195
15.6.1. Window Panel...................................................................................................... 195
15.6.2. Service Windows................................................................................................. 197
15.7. Window State (Layout Mode).................................................................................... 198
Appendix 1. Data Composition System Expression Language....................................... 201

1.1. Operations with Numbers............................................................................................. 202
1.2. Operations with Rows.................................................................................................. 203
1.3. Comparison Operations................................................................................................ 204
1.4. Aggregate Functions..................................................................................................... 206
1.5. Other Operations.......................................................................................................... 209
1.6. Functions...................................................................................................................... 211
Appendix 2. Text Editor..................................................................................................... 223
2.1. Editing Text Documents............................................................................................... 223
2.2. Creating and Opening a Text Document...................................................................... 223
2.3. Selecting an Extension for a Text Document............................................................... 224
2.4. Inputting and Editing Text........................................................................................... 224
2.4.1. Moving the Cursor................................................................................................. 224

2.4.2. Go to a Text Line................................................................................................... 224
2.4.3. Using Bookmarks.................................................................................................. 224
2.4.4. Selecting Blocks of Text........................................................................................ 225
2.4.5. Operations on Selected Blocks.............................................................................. 225
2.4.6. Deleting Text......................................................................................................... 225
2.4.7. Inserting a Page Break........................................................................................... 225
2.4.8. Undo Changes........................................................................................................ 225
2.4.9. Search and Replace................................................................................................ 226
2.4.10. Saving a Text Document...................................................................................... 227
2.4.11. Printing a Text Document.................................................................................... 227
2.4.12. Closing Text Documents..................................................................................... 228
Appendix 3. Spreadsheet Document Editor..................................................................... 229

3.1. Spreadsheet Documents in 1C:Enterprise ................................................................... 229
10
3.2. Operations with Spreadsheet Documents..................................................................... 230

3.3. Creating and Opening Spreadsheet Documents........................................................... 230
3.4. Saving Spreadsheet Documents................................................................................... 230
3.5. Closing Spreadsheet Documents.................................................................................. 231
3.6. Viewing Spreadsheet Documents................................................................................. 231
3.6.1. Names.................................................................................................................... 233
3.6.2. Cell Text Input....................................................................................................... 234
3.7. Selecting Cells, Rows, and Columns in a Spreadsheet................................................ 235
3.8. Search and Replace...................................................................................................... 236
3.9. Changing Row Height and Column Width.................................................................. 237
3.10. Moving and Copying Cells......................................................................................... 238
3.11. Adding and Deleting Cells......................................................................................... 240
3.12. Split Cells................................................................................................................... 241
3.13. Specifying Varying Column Widths.......................................................................... 241
3.14. Hiding and Showing Rows and Columns................................................................... 242
3.15. Merge Cells................................................................................................................ 243
3.16. Working with Named Areas of Spreadsheet Documents........................................... 243
3.16.1. Creating a Named Area........................................................................................ 244
3.16.2. Named Area Viewing Mode ............................................................................... 244
3.16.3. Deleting a Named Area ...................................................................................... 244
3.16.4. Resizing Named Areas ....................................................................................... 244
3.17. Working with Spreadsheet Document Groups........................................................... 244
3.17.1. Creating a Group.................................................................................................. 245
3.17.2. Viewing Groups................................................................................................... 245
3.17.3. Deleting a Group.................................................................................................. 246
3.17.4. Resizing Groups. Nested and External Groups................................................... 246
3.18. Using Graphical Objects............................................................................................ 247
3.18.1. Inserting Graphical Objects................................................................................. 248
3.18.2. Linking Graphical Objects................................................................................... 249
3.18.3. Selecting and Resizing Graphical Objects........................................................... 249
3.18.4. Aligning Groups of Graphical Objects................................................................ 250
3.18.5. Setting the Graphical Object Group Size............................................................. 250
3.18.6. Moving and Copying Graphical Objects............................................................. 251
3.18.7. Changing Graphical Object Order....................................................................... 251
3.18.8. Deleting Graphical Objects.................................................................................. 251
3.18.9. Grouping Graphical Objects................................................................................ 251
3.18.10. Graphical Object Names.................................................................................... 252
3.18.11. Working with Charts.......................................................................................... 252
3.18.12. Creating Charts.................................................................................................. 252
3.18.13. Chart Data Area................................................................................................. 253
3.19. Working with OLE Objects........................................................................................ 254
3.20. Working with Spreadsheets in "Template" Mode...................................................... 254
3.21. General Principles of Template Design...................................................................... 254
3.22. Print Setup.................................................................................................................. 256
3.23. Headers and Footers................................................................................................... 256
3.24. Pagination................................................................................................................... 256
Contents
11
3.25. Auto Repetition of Rows and Columns...................................................................... 257

3.26. Specify Print Area...................................................................................................... 257
3.27. Page Setup.................................................................................................................. 257
3.28. Printing a Spreadsheet Document.............................................................................. 258
3.29. Editing Spreadsheet and Cell Properties.................................................................... 259
3.29.1. Spreadsheet Document Properties....................................................................... 259
3.29.2. Specifying a Background Picture for a Sheet...................................................... 261
3.29.3. Print Area Definition........................................................................................... 262
3.29.4. Defining Repeating Rows and Columns.............................................................. 263
3.30. Cell Properties............................................................................................................ 263
3.30.1. Main Property Category....................................................................................... 263
3.30.2. Position Property Category.................................................................................. 264
3.30.3. Appearance Property Category............................................................................ 264
Appendix 4. HTML Document Editor.............................................................................. 267
4.1. Purpose......................................................................................................................... 267
4.2. Creating HTML Document.......................................................................................... 267
4.3. Saving........................................................................................................................... 267
4.4. Editing.......................................................................................................................... 267
4.5. Entering Text................................................................................................................ 267
4.6. Formatting Text............................................................................................................ 268
4.7. Inserting and Editing a Table ...................................................................................... 268
4.8. Inserting a Picture......................................................................................................... 268
4.9. Label............................................................................................................................. 269
4.10. Links........................................................................................................................... 269
4.11. Bookmarks.................................................................................................................. 270
4.12. Line............................................................................................................................. 270
4.13. Formatting HTML Documents................................................................................... 270
4.14. Editing in HTML Format........................................................................................... 270
4.15. Viewing the Results.................................................................................................... 270
Appendix 5. Graphical Schema Editor............................................................................. 271
5.1. Editing a Schema.......................................................................................................... 271
5.2. Inserting Items into a Graphical Schema..................................................................... 271
5.2.1. Copying Graphical Schema Items......................................................................... 272
5.3. Layout Grid.................................................................................................................. 272
5.4. Actions on Selected Group of Controls........................................................................ 273
5.4.1. Managing Alignment and Distribution of Schema Items...................................... 273
5.4.2. Distributing Schema Items.................................................................................... 274
5.4.3. Setting Sizes ......................................................................................................... 274
5.4.4. Order of Items........................................................................................................ 275
5.4.5. Scale....................................................................................................................... 275
5.4.6. Scrolling a Graphical Schema................................................................................ 275
5.4.7. Print and Print Preview.......................................................................................... 275
5.5. Graphical Schema Properties....................................................................................... 276
5.5.1. Appearance Property Category.............................................................................. 276
5.5.2. Edit Property Category.......................................................................................... 276
12
5.6. Graphical Schema Items............................................................................................... 276

5.6.1. Main Property Category......................................................................................... 277
5.6.3. Characteristics Property Category......................................................................... 277
5.6.4. Location Property Category................................................................................... 278
5.6.5. Decorative Line .................................................................................................... 278
5.6.7. Characteristics Property Category......................................................................... 279
5.6.8. Decoration.............................................................................................................. 279
5.6.10. Point of Action..................................................................................................... 279
5.6.11. Addressing Property Category............................................................................. 280
5.6.12. Fork Point............................................................................................................ 280
5.6.13. Condition Point.................................................................................................... 280
5.6.14. End Point............................................................................................................. 280
5.6.15. Start Point............................................................................................................ 280
5.6.16. Joining Point........................................................................................................ 280
5.6.17. Embedded Business Process Point...................................................................... 281
5.6.18. Processing Point................................................................................................... 281
5.6.19. Transition Choice Point....................................................................................... 281
5.6.20. Transition Property Category............................................................................... 281
Appendix 6. Geographical Schema Editor....................................................................... 283
6.1. Creating a Geographical Schema................................................................................. 285
6.2. Saving a Geographical Schema.................................................................................... 285
6.3. Customizing a Geographical Schema........................................................................... 285
6.3.1. Legend Elements Setup......................................................................................... 287
6.3.2. Object Properties.................................................................................................... 288
6.4. Geographical Schema Properties.................................................................................. 289
6.4.2. Series Property Category....................................................................................... 290
6.5. Geographical Schema Title Properties......................................................................... 290
6.6. Geographical Schema Legend Properties..................................................................... 291
6.7. Text Search and Replace.............................................................................................. 292
Introduction
This manual (hereinafter, Manual) is intended for 1C:Enterprise application users.
It describes the basic concepts and features that are common for all 1C:Enterprise
applications.
For information about application-specific features, consult the manual delivered
with the application.
For information about development and administration of 1C:Enterprise applications, consult the following manuals: "1C:Enterprise 8.2. Developer Guide" and
"1C:Enterprise8.2. Administrator Guide".
Structure of the Manual

Chapter 1 provides an overview of the 1C:Enterprise platform.
Chapter 2 describes 1C:Enterprise installation and update.
Chapter 3 describes 1C:Enterprise application startup.
Chapter 4 describes common application interface elements.
Chapter 5 describes operations with forms.
Chapter 6 describes operations with lists.
Chapter 7 describes operations with various data types.
Chapters 8 and 9 describe operations with reports and report variants.
Chapter 10 describes service capabilities of the platform: references, favorites,
history, built-in calculator, and so on.
Chapter 11 describes customization of the interface, forms, and system parameters.
Chapter 12 describes operations with help.
Chapter 13 describes operations with the web client.
Chapter 14 describes working with the platform in the slow connection mode.
14
Chapter 15 describes working with the platform in the "ordinary" application

mode.
Appendix 1 describes the data composition system expression language, which is
used for creating custom report fields.
The next Appendixes describe other 1C:Enterprise built-in editors. Appendix 2
describes the text editor; Appendix 3 covers the spreadsheet editor used to view,
edit, and print output forms of documents and reports; Appendix 4 is dedicated to
the HTML document editor; Appendix 5 describes the graphical schema editor; and
Appendix 6 covers the geographical schema editor.
Note Types
The Manual includes the following note types:
Tip an alternative method that you can use.
note additional information.
IMPORtant! information that is important for correct operation of the
platform.
Conventions
Keys: The key names are emphasized, for example: Enter, Esc, Del.
"Cursor control keys" refers to the arrow keys. They are referred individually as Up
Arrow, Down Arrow, Right Arrow, and Left Arrow.
Keyboard shortcuts: The shortcut key combos are given as follows: Ctrl+F3.
Buttons: The button names in forms or dialog boxes, as well as bookmark names,
are given without quotation marks, for example: OK, Cancel, Delete.
Action description: You can perform all actions described in the Manual (such as
opening document journals, entering documents, generating reports, and so on) by
selecting menu items (in the main window, an active window, or a context menu).
In most cases you can perform the same actions using the command bar buttons.
When selecting a menu item, pay attention to the icon to the left of the item name.
The command bar button with the same icon performs the same action.
To select an item, usually you have to left-click it once or twice.
What You Need To Know

It is assumed that you are familiar with the operating system of the computer where
1C:Enterprise is installed, and that you have the basic skills required to work with
this operating system.
You must be familiar with the following concepts: the Start menu, windows, menus,
standard dialog boxes, operating system clipboard, and the Control Panel.
Introduction
15
If you have not completely mastered these concepts, it is recommended that you to
refer to the operating system documentation.
Books Included in the Documentation

The documentation package includes the following books:
"1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual". Describes the basic concepts and features
that are common for all 1C:Enterprise applications.
"1C:Enterprise8.2. Developer Guide". Describes how to customize applications
to reflect the accounting procedures in a specific company, as well as how to

develop new applications.
"1C:Enterprise8.2. Administrator Guide". Describes 1C:Enterprise administration, including features related to building client-server systems.
"1:Enterprise 8.2. Client-Server. Administrator Guide". Describes
1C:Enterprise installation and operation with client-server infobase versions.
The syntax of the 1C:Enterprise script and query language is described in
"1C:Enterprise 8.2. Developer Guide". The full object model description is included
in the distribution kit in the electronic form (in the Designer help topics and in the
Syntax Assistant).
important!
The distribution kit for a specific product may not include some of the books.
Text Files Included in the 1C:Enterprise8.2 Distribution Kit

The distribution kit includes electronic documents that include the descriptions
of installation and update procedures, as well as the list of features added in this
version. They are copied to the hard disk during 1C:Enterprise installation.
These documents are located in the directory with 1C:Enterprise installation files,
in the \docs\en subdirectory. If you do not change the default installation path, they
are copied to C:\Program Files\1cv82\VersionNumber\docs\en. The VersionNumber
stands for the 1C:Enterprise version number. For example, this is how the path
looks for version 8.2.9.300: C:\Program Files\1cv82\8.2.9.300\docs\en.
The file V8Update.htm contains the list of changes as compared to previous platform versions, and update instructions.
The file Files\1cv82\VersionNumber\licenses\1CEnterprise_en.htm contains the
1C:Enterprise license agreement.
The following directory contains the license agreements for third-party components
used in the platform: C:\ProgramFiles\1cv82\VersionNumber\licenses\3rd_party.
16
About 1C:Enterprise8 Page

For links to frequently used 1C:Enterprise resources, see http://v8.1c.ru/eng/AllInfo/.
This web page contains links intended for the following groups of users:
Applications users,
Applications developers,
1C Company partners.
1C:Enterprise8 Web Site

For information on the 1C:Enterprise8 technological platform and on the standard
applications developed by 1C Company, see http://v8.1c.ru/eng.
1C:Developer Network
1C:Developer Network at http://www.1c-dn.com helps developers to create business
solutions based on the 1C:Enterprise platform.
The 1C:Developer Network library at http://1c-dn.com/library/what_is_1c_enterprise/ has information for both novice and experienced developers, and provides
you with everything needed to create a complete business solution from scratch.
Chapter 1
About 1C:Enterprise
1C:Enterprise is a universal software system that is intended to automate accounting,
planning, and management tasks of enterprises as well as to solve personal tasks.
1C:Enterprise operation is divided into two separate processes: setup (configuration development) and the user operation itself related to accounting or processing
various calculations.
Configuration development. At the 1C:Enterprise configuration development
stage, an application is developed in compliance with the features of a specific
enterprise. This is when the structure of objects and their display are defined, roles
are created for various levels of users and also when the interface is described.
To learn more about configuration development, see "1C:Enterprise 8.2. Developer
Guide".
Besides, this is also the stage when various administrative actions can be carried
out. These actions may include user list maintenance, infobase parameters setup,
event log customization, configuration update, etc.
User operation. A user works with the infobase when the software is launched in
the 1C:Enterprise mode. This is when the software actually operates to accomplish
its goals: data input, generation of various reports, various scheduled calculations,
etc.
A user works with the data that have their structure defined in the configuration.
At that the user relies on the algorithms created during configuration development.
This Manual provides a general description of the procedures used to operate
1C:Enterprise in different modes: data display and input, obtaining reports, interface
customization, etc. The configuration description itself can explain the specifics of
operations with individual objects that depend on the configuration. In this case you
can use the help mode to learn the explanations (see the chapter "Getting Help").
18
Chapter 2
Software Installation
and Update
This chapter briefly covers 1C:Enterprise installation and update procedures and
installation of configurations.
2.1. Software Installation

1C:Enterprise includes the components designed to develop and use solutions
(configurations) for accounting and enterprise business activities automation, as
well as for personal goals.
1C:Enterprise installation can be primary, when the selected components are
installed completely, or secondary, if you need to modify, reinstall, or uninstall
some or all of the system components.
An installer is launched automatically when a disk inserted into a drive. If autorun
is disabled on a computer, you should run autorun.exe.
Fig. 1. Installer
20
The installer prompts you to select installation mode: quick installation and launch
or custom installation (see fig. 1).
When you select Quick Installation and Launch (recommended), the installer will
install the 1C:Enterprise platform and configuration available on the disk to the
default directories.
When you select Custom installation or when quick installation is not available for
a specific distribution kit, the installer will prompt you to specify the component to
be installed.
Fig. 2. Custom installation menu
2.1.1. Platform Installation

Once the preliminary actions are completed, an installer Welcome screen will be
displayed.
Fig. 3. Installer welcome screen
Chapter 2. Software Installation and Update
21
Click Next > to proceed with installation.

The installer proceeds in various manners depending on whether 1C:Enterprise is
already installed or if it is the initial installation.
The installer prompts you to select the components for 1C:Enterprise installation.
Specify an installation directory Folder: where the selected components will be
copied to.
You may use the installation directory name suggested by the launched or enter
another name by clicking Browse.
When you select the components and specify a directory, click Next> to continue
with the installation.
During initial installation, by default the launcher suggests to install the component
named 1C:Enterprise. This component includes all the platform features that are
required to work on a user computer: thick and thin clients and configuration development and administration tools.
Fig. 4. Selecting installation of the 1C:Enterprise basic components
Click Next> if you do not need any specific customization of the installation.
22
If you only need to install the thin client to connect to an infobase on a server or on
a web server, select 1C:Enterprise thin client.
Fig. 5. Selecting installation of thin client components for client-server mode
Click Next> to proceed with installation.

If you only need to install the thin client to work with a file infobase, select
1C:Enterprise thin client, file mode version from the list of components.
Fig. 6. Thin client installation for file operation mode
Chapter 2. Software Installation and Update
23
2.1.2. Selecting Interface Language

At the next step the installer will prompt you to select a default interface language.
Fig. 7. Selecting default interface language
Specify an interface to use as the default one.

Click Next> to proceed with installation.
The installer copies files and creates program folders and shortcuts. Next the
installer will prompt you to install the HASPDeviceDriver security driver.
IMPORTANT!
The driver needs to be installed if a dongle will be plugged into a USB port of
this computer.
When you click Next>, the final state of the installer is displayed. Clicking Finish
completes 1C:Enterprise installation.
2.2. Configuration Installation

To install a configuration independently:
1. Run the configuration installer (setup.exe).
2. In the template directory selection dialog specify the directory to install the
configuration to.
3. Click Next>.
4. When the installer completes copying of files, click Finish.
The selected configuration is now installed.
24
2.3. Obtaining a License

Depending on the type of distribution kit, a license is provided to the user in the
form of a hardware key or a PIN for receiving an electronic software license.
When you obtain a software license, it is provided according to computer parameters such as the name, the version, the OS serial number and installation date, the
motherboard name and the number of processors.
If any of these parameters change, you will have to obtain a new software license
for the platform with a new PIN.
For details on protection from unauthorized use of 1C:Enterprise 8 and a full list
of key parameters, see "The 1C:Enterprise 8. Administrator Manual", chapter 9,
"Protection from Unauthorized Use. Features and Setup". For details on obtaining
a software license, see the appendix "Guidelines for Obtaining a Software License"
in "The 1:Enterprise8.2. Administrator Manual".
Chapter 3
Getting Started
This chapter explains how to launch the 1C:Enterprise client application.
3.1. Application Startup

To launch 1C:Enterprise, from the Windows taskbar select Start All Programs
1C Enterprise 8.2 1C:Enterprise.
In the window that opens select an infobase and click 1C:Enterprise.
Fig. 8. 1C:Enterprise startup dialog
To add an infobase to the list, click the Add button. For details on adding and
creating infobases, see "Adding an Infobase" on the page27.
To modify infobase parameters, click Change.
3.2. Login
When an infobase is launched, the system verifies user infobase access rights
authenticates the user.
26
If the infobase does not have a user list, the user will be logged in.
If the infobase has a user list, user authentication options may be connected to the
operating system settings depending on the system configuration.
If no such setting is specified, you will be prompted to enter the user name and
password.
Fig. 9. Login
Specify the user name in this dialog. To do so, select a user from the list or type the
name in the User field and enter the password (if specified).
The user is logged in after clicking OK.
To cancel software startup, click Cancel.
3.2.1. Web Client Startup

To launch 1C:Enterprise in the web client mode, enter the URL of the infobase
to the web browser address bar. At that the web browser should be specifically
configured. For details on web browser configuration, see "Microsoft Internet
Explorer Configuration" on the page173 and "Mozilla Firefox Configuration" on
the page174.
3.2.2. Connection Speed Selection

If the infobase parameters make it possible to select the connection speed mode, the
startup dialog will have the Slow connection option available:
Fig. 10. Infobase option
Chapter 3. Getting Started
27
If Slow connection is checked, 1C:Enterprise operation will feature some specifics

listed in "Slow Connection Mode". It is recommended to check it when you connect
to the infobase using a slow communication path, e.g. using a GPRS modem.
3.3. Adding an Infobase

To add a new infobase to the list, click Add in the infobase list dialog. The addition
mode selection dialog is displayed.
Fig. 11. Selecting a mode for adding an infobase
3.3.1. Creating an Infobase

If Create a new infobase is selected, 1C:Enterprise provides an opportunity to
create an infobase based on a template infobase or to create an empty infobase.
When you click Next>, a selection dialog is displayed.
Fig. 12. Dialog to select infobase creation mode
28
Select a template in the template list and click Next>. A dialog is displayed to enter
the name and select the location type for the infobase.
Fig. 13. Infobase name entry dialog
An infobase name is an arbitrary string of characters.

An infobase can be located on a local computer, in a network, on the 1C:Enterprise
server or on a web server.
Click Next> to proceed with infobase creation.
Based on the selected type of location, specify the required infobase parameters and
click Next>.
At the next step select the infobase startup options:
Fig. 14. Startup options editing dialog
The Authentication method option can have the following values:

Autoselect in this case authentication using operating system tools is attempted
initially while if this attempt fails, the user will be prompted to enter login/password to access the infobase.
Chapter 3. Getting Started
29
Prompt for name and password in this case login and password entry dialog
will always be used for authentication.

The Connection speed option is intended to define the speed of connection with the
infobase or 1C:Enterprise server. The following values are possible for the option:
Normal regular speed. No specific issues regarding system operation.
Low slow connection. In this mode there are some specific characteristics
in 1C:Enterprise behavior that are described in the chapter "Slow Connection
Mode". This mode must be used when you are working with slow connection
channels, for example, when connecting through a GPRS modem.
Select at start in this mode every time an infobase is launched, it will be
possible to select the connection speed. The Slow connection check box at the
bottom of the 1C:Enterprise Startup window makes it possible. If a specific
value (Normal or Low) is set in the infobase properties, the Slow connection
check box in the 1C:Enterprise Startup window cannot be toggled and matches
the value selected in the infobase properties.
The Additional startup options field is intended to specify various command line
options that will be transferred to the executable file. For details on the command
line options, see the built-in help (1C:Enterprise8 Launch and Startup Options).
The Default run mode option determines the client that will be used to access the
infobase:
Autoselect in this mode the client application type will be selected automatically.
Thin client thin client will be used to run the infobase.
Web client web client will be used to run the infobase.
Thick client thick client will be used to run the infobase.
1C:Enterprise version: field is intended to specify a specific version number that
should be used to access this infobase.
For details on operations with infobase list, see "1C:Enterprise 8.2. Administrator
Guide" for the chapter describing infobase list maintenance.
30
Chapter 4
Software Interface
This chapter describes 1C:Enterprise interface and navigation.
In 1C:Enterprise a user operates a system of windows. Two types of windows exist:
main window and auxiliary windows.
The main application window is designed to navigate the application and execute
various commands. An auxiliary window is used to work with specific infobase
objects (such as documents or list items), to generate reports or execute data processors.
By default, each 1C:Enterprise window is displayed on the taskbar and at the
window toggle when you press the Alt+Tab keys.
In Windows 7, all windows apart from an infobase list window are grouped in a
single group on the taskbar.
You can use Ctrl + Tab keyboard shortcut to switch between windows of one
session.
In 1C:Enterprise, you can work in the tabs of a main window working area instead
of separate windows. See the "Working in the Tab Mode" section on page 40 for
more details.
4.1. Main Window

When the system is started up, the main window is displayed. This window is
intended to navigate the software and execute various commands. This window
presents the entire structure of the application to a user. The most general breakup
of functionality is presented in the uppermost part of the window as a sections
panel.
32
In general, the main application window looks as follows:
Fig. 15. Main application window
This window is arranged so that it allows finding the areas required promptly
enough and for execution of the commands needed. To resize the main window,
you can use the small area in the lower right corner (with three buried dots).
The application title is 'aggregatory' and includes the area of system commands.
The left part of the title includes the main menu, the Back/Forward buttons to navigate between software areas, and the menu to work with favorites (Favorites).
Fig. 16. Main command bar of the main window
The main menu only includes general commands. These are the commands for
operations on files, windows management commands, service commands, etc.
Chapter 4. Software Interface
33
Tip
Press F10 to go to the main menu of the active window when you use your keyboard.
The application title is located in the center.
Fig. 17. Right part of the system commands area
By default the right part of the system commands area includes the commands for
operations on files, to work with references and standard features such as opening a
calendar, a calculator, etc.
To close the main window and exit the application, use File Exit command of
the main menu or click the Close button of the main window. You can navigate
the application using your keyboard. The built-in help includes the tables listing
keyboard shortcuts used for navigation.
4.1.1. Desktop
When you launch the application, the first section to be displayed is the one named
the Desktop. To switch to the desktop from other sections, use the Desktop item of
the sections panel. Press F6 to switch between desktop forms.
For example, a desktop may be arranged as follows:
Fig. 18. Application Desktop
34
You can customize arrangement of forms on the desktop. To open the desktop setup
dialog, use a corresponding option in the shortcut menu, which can be launched on
any panel when a desktop is open.
For details on desktop customization, see "Desktop" on the page141.
4.1.2. Sections Panel

The sections panel lists the sections included in the system.
Fig. 19. Sample sections panel
To switch to a section you need, click a reference in the section name or its picture.
When you switch to a section, its content (including nested sections) is displayed as
commands in two panels (navigation panel and action panel) and forms in the work
area.
If the list of sections does not fit the size of the window, scroll buttons will be
displayed at the edges of the list:
Fig. 20. Sample scroll buttons on the sections panel

Tip
Press Alt+1 on your keyboard to switch to the sections panel.
You can also customize the sections panel. To open the sections panel setup dialog,
use a suitable option in the shortcut menu, which can be launched on any panel of
the window. Such customization is described in detail in "Sections Panel" on the
page197.
4.1.3. Navigation Panel

The navigation panel demonstrates the structure of the current section. The panel is
a list of hyperlinks. If a section has any subordinate sections, they will be displayed
as collapsible groups.
35
Fig. 21. Groups of commands on the navigation panel
The links on the navigation panel are divided into three groups based on specific
importance of various work areas:
Important links to the work areas that are mostly important for the current
section,
Normal links to the data of the current section,
See also links to additional information that may not be directly included in
the data of the current section but in some situations may be required.
The content of the list of links and how links are arranged into groups (i.e. importance of links) are specified during configuration development.
When you click links, new forms are usually opened. At that the forms are opened
directly in the main window and replace each other in the work area. To open a
form in a new window, select Open in a new window from the link context menu
or click the link while holding Shift down.
NOTE
If a command on the navigation panel does not open a new form, the previous
form in the work area is closed.
Tip
Press Alt + 2 on your keyboard to switch to the navigation panel of the current
section.
You can customize the navigation panel. To open the panel setup dialog, use a suitable option in the shortcut menu, which can be launched on any of the panels.
For details on navigation panel, see "Navigation Panel" on the page143.
4.1.4. Action Panel

The action panel includes the lists of commands available in the current section.
These commands are divided into the following groups: Create, Reports, Tools.
Other groups may be available if they are specified in the configuration.
36
The Create group contains commands intended to create new infobase objects, such
as documents and list items.
The Reports group contains the commands intended to open forms of reports.
The Tools group displays the commands to open service tools. If a group is empty,
it is not displayed. You can adjust the height and the width of the panel.
When you hover your mouse over a command name, a tooltip is displayed that may
provide further information about the action or a link to such information.
Fig. 22. Groups of commands on the action panel
To execute a command of the action panel in a new window, use Open in a new
window item of the context menu or select the option while holding Shift down.
To resize the action panel, hover your mouse over the three buried dots, left-click
them and drag as required. At that, if some of the commands do not fit the available
space, these commands will be displayed in the menu that is opened when you click
the expand button. For example, as shown in the figure below:
Fig. 23. List of commands in the create group

Note
The height of action panel is stored between sessions for every section independently.
Tip
Press Alt+3 on your keyboard to switch to the action panel of the current section.
The assortment and arrangement of commands in the groups of the action panel
can be customized in the customization form (for details, see "Action Panel" on
the page144). To open the panel setup dialog, use a suitable option in the shortcut
menu, which can be launched on any window panel.
37
4.1.5. Information Panel

This panel is used to open history windows, review the last data edited by the user
and display a list of the latest notifications (information about system actions).
Fig. 24. Information panel
Clicking the History button will open the list of the last modified objects.
For details on using history, see "History" on the page127.
When you click a hyperlink of a notification, a form will be opened for the object
linked to by this hyperlink. For example, clicking the hyperlink Kornet ZAO will
open the form of the list item Contractors Kornet ZAO. For details on notifications, see "Notifications" on the page129.
4.2. Auxiliary Window

Auxiliary windows are intended to work with infobase objects, to generate reports
and to process data. These windows are displayed independently from the main
window. Auxiliary windows may also display a navigation panel. This panel makes
it possible to switch to the forms logically connected to the default form of the
window without opening a new window.
Fig. 25. Auxiliary window. Sales document
38
An auxiliary window is closed using File Close command which does not close
the entire application.
Unlimited number of auxiliary windows can be displayed by the software. You can
only have one auxiliary window opened for every object (e.g., a document or a list
item) unless otherwise specified in the configuration.
TIP
You can drag files from the operating system (for example, from the Explorer
window) to the main or auxiliary window of the application. This will result in
opening the files same as when you use File Open command.
4.2.1. Auxiliary Window Navigation

A navigation panel of an auxiliary window is intended to switch to viewing various
data logically connected to those displayed in the default form of the window.
A navigation panel may include commands used to switch to the form itself as well
as groups of links Go to and See also. If any group is not specified during configuration development, it will not be displayed. Other commands may be included in
the navigation panel depending on the configuration.
If you attempt to click a link for an object that has not been saved, the following
warning will be displayed: Data has not yet been recorded. Switching to """" is
allowed only after data is recorded. The data will be recorded.
When you click OK, the current data will be saved and you will switch to the
selected data area. If you click Cancel, the data will not be saved and you will not
switch to the data area so you can continue editing the current data normally.
Operations with navigation panel in the auxiliary window is similar to those for the
navigation panel in the main window with the only exception being that you cannot
switch to the form itself in a new window.
To return to the default form of an auxiliary window, click the hyperlink in the top
of the navigation panel. Note that it is not allowed to open a new window when
clicking this link.
4.2.2. Form Command Bar

A command bar of a form includes the commands that are directly related to the
object displayed in the default form. The commands are displayed on the panel as
buttons.
39
Fig. 26. Form command bar in an auxiliary window
The default button (the one used when Enter is pressed) is marked on a panel by
bold text and a special form. On the form command bar in an auxiliary window the
default button is Post and Close.
4.3. General Workflow

When working in the 1C:Enterprise mode, a user selects a section of the software.
In the section the user switches to the forms currently needed and works with them
using navigation panel commands. A user can switch between the displayed data
and work with such data both using the mouse and the keyboard.
4.4. Windowing system operation on multiple monitors

The 1C:Enterprise platform allows a user to work comfortable with multiple monitors. There are several features of the windowing system, listed below:
The 1C:Enterprise Startup window is opened on the monitor where it was closed
during the previous session.
The Splash screen, the Authentication dialog and other startup dialogs: on the
first launch are displayed on the first monitor, on next launches are displayed on
the monitor where the main window was opened.
The main window of 1C:Enterprise is opened on the monitor where it was
closed by the user in previous session.
The Notification window and the Status window are opened on the monitor
where the previous active window was opened.
The helper (neither modal or blocking) window might be moved by the user to
another monitor. On the next call it will be opened on the monitor where it was
closed previously.
Modal and blocking windows are opened on the same monitor where the
blocked window is. If the window on closing was displayed not on the same
monitor as the owner, it will be opened next time on the place where it was
closed. If the window on closing was on the same monitor as the owner, it will
be opened on the same monitor as the owner.
40
4.5. Working in the Tab Mode

In 1C:Enterprise, you can work with the forms in a main window working area
instead of in separate windows. In this mode, all operations are performed in a
single window, which may be convenient when you are working with several infobases or a large number of forms at the same time.
The forms are displayed on the tabs of the main window working area.
Fig. 27. The program interface in the tab mode
To change the interface mode to working with tabs, select Tools Settings in the
main menu. In the dialog, set the switch Form opening Mode to In tabs. The setting
will apply starting from the first session after restarting.
It should be noted that user settings in the tab mode are stored separately from user
settings in the separate windows mode.
The main window navigation history is not supported in this mode.
4.5.1. Tabs
Tabs are created for each form opened. Any number of tabs can be opened on the
window bar.
Fig. 28. The Window Bar
41
To switch between the tabs, use the mouse keys or the following keyboard shortcuts: Ctrl+Tab (Ctrl+Shift+Tab) and Ctrl+F6 (Ctrl+Shift+F6).
To close a form, press Esc, Ctrl+F4 or the Close form button on the tab.
Switching between the sections does not close the form opened, unlike the separate
windows mode.
Desktop tab. If there are any forms on the desktop, the Desktop tab is the first to
be displayed. The tab is automatically displayed at the start and can be closed by
pressing Esc.
List of tabs. To view a list of all open windows, press the button at the right edge
of the window bar. The desktop form will be the first in the list followed by other
open forms in alphabetic order. When a form from the list is selected, it is activated
on the tab.
Forms which lock the owner, lock only the window with the owner form. You can
still switch between the tabs with other forms and select sections and commands
from navigation and/or action panels.
Opening a form in a separate window. To open a form on the tab in a separate
window, use the Open in a separate window command in the tabs shortcut menu.
This action is only available for forms with a URL. For example, you cannot open a
form for creating an element in a new window on the tab.
Commands. Commands on the navigation and action panels open forms in the main
window working area. You can open these forms in a new tab with the shortcut
menu. A new form in a new tab opens when Open in a new tab is selected for the
commands. To open a form in a new tab, select the command while pressing the
Ctrl key. To switch to the navigation panel of the window on the tab, press Alt+ 4.
Commands applicable to forms and some other types of documents are displayed in
the main window system menu when a document is activated.
The Print, Preview and Save commands are always displayed in the main window
and are available for documents that support these commands.
Message window. The forms opened in a main window working area use one of
the main windows message panels. As you switch between the tabs, the message
window displays messages that relate to the form selected. See the section
"Messages" on page 129 for more details on working with messages.
Windows menu. The Windows menu (launched at Main menu Windows) displays
windows, including the main window, and the names of any documents opened in
the tabs. The current auxiliary window and an active tab of the main window are
flagged. The main window is flagged when no tabs are open.
42
4.6. The Functions Menu

In the tab mode, a button for opening the functions menu is added into the system
commands area.
The functions menu offers convenient access to the commands of any section and
contains all of the current sections commands that are grouped in a similar way as
the navigation and action panels.
The functions menu can be launched by pressing the relevant button in the system
commands area or pressing Alt+`.
If the sections panel is missing, it will be displayed automatically when the functions menu is launched. If the sections panel, navigation panel or action panel is
disabled, it may be launched by pressing Alt+1, Alt+2 or Alt+3 respectively.
Fig. 29. An open functions menu
If you are using a keyboard, you can navigate the commands with the arrow keys
(cursor movement keys) and the Home, End and Tab keys.
A command is executed with a mouse click, by pressing Enter or the space bar,
or with the Open in a new tab command in the shortcut menu. The menu closes
automatically when a command is selected.
If the functions menu is open and a section is switched, the commands are updated
for the section selected. When the functions menu opens, the last command
executed is highlighted.
To close the functions menu, press the Esc button or the cross in the upper right
corner of the Functions menu.
43
4.7. Panels Setup

The navigation and action panels may be displayed even if they contain no
commands. Please note that the height of the action panel does not change when
you switch between the sections.
Use the commands in the main View menu if you want to customize or hide any of
the panels.
Fig. 30. The View menu
This submenu allows you to manage the visibility of the panels as well as the
content of the sections, navigation and action panels, and the desktop. You can
increase the area available for the forms and avoid having to use scrollbars. To hide
all panels, use the View Hide all command bars command in the main menu or
press Ctrl+Shift+`. Please note that the Hide all command bars command will not
work if the sections panel or navigation and action panels are hidden with the View
menu.
44
Chapter 5
Operation in Forms
In 1C:Enterprise a user operates forms. A form may contain various items that are
used to display information and for users to edit this information. These items can
include text boxes, command bars, buttons, check boxes, bookmarks, tables, various
charts, fields of text, spreadsheet and HTML documents, fields of geographical and
graphical schemas. This chapter covers general techniques used to work with forms
and form elements.
5.1. General Techniques of Working with Forms

There are several items which every form has. Normally a form title includes the
name of the object or the list of objects displayed in the form. A title for a form is
specified during configuration development and cannot be customized by a user.
To select an object, hover your mouse over the object and left-click it. Alternatively, use the cursor control keys if you use your keyboard.
To switch to editing an object, double-click it or press Enter.
Form elements may contain tooltips describing the meaning of such items (defined
during configuration development). In order to see a tooltip for a specific form
attribute, hover your mouse cursor over this attribute. In 1 to 2 seconds, a label will
appear near the cursor that describes the purpose of the attribute (provided that the
label was created upon setup of the form).
Navigation through form elements. You can navigate through form elements by
pressing Tab or Shift+Tab or by clicking the necessary dialog control.
Some elements (for example, the command bar) can be unavailable for navigation
with Tab or Shift+Tab based on their settings. You should use your mouse or press
Alt+F10 to navigate to such items.
You can also press Enter when you complete entering an attribute. This will move
the cursor directly to the next dialog item. The sequence of such movements is
defined during configuration development.
46
If provided for in the configuration, a form may also verify whether the entered data
is correct and complete. Error messages may be displayed in case of incorrect input.
Besides, when you complete entering an attribute, the system may also automatically carry out some actions (for example, filling values of other form attributes).
Saving form parameters. If a form can be resized, the forms size and its location
on the screen will be remembered when the form is closed and reopened. At the
same time the controls will also preserve the sizes they had when the form was
closed.
Appearance of a form is defined in the configuration and can be customized if
customization for the form is supported (All Actions Change form menu item).
The procedure used to customize forms is described in the "Form Setup" section on
the page 147.
5.2. Dragging operations

The 1C:Enterprise system supports dragging operations. You can transfer data
between various controls. For example, you can transfer catalog list items from one
group to another or data from a table box into a spreadsheet document field or a list
of selected files from MS Windows Explorer to a control.
The following controls support dragging operations: table box, spreadsheet document field, calendar field and picture box.
The possibility of dragging is specified by each control configuring. You can find information about this option in the description of working with the configuration. Basic
actions for controls for which dragging operations are specified are described below.
For each object the possibility can be specified to Begin dragging (you can drag
from this object) and To drag (you can drag to this object). These properties are set
by configuring and can be changed using the built-in language.
Dragging is performed by the mouse and is similar to the standard MSWindows
method.
If dragging events processing is not changed by configuring, simple dragging is
performed. Its result depends on the controls type and initial data type.
Simple dragging possibilities are shown in the following table:
Target control
Source control
Calendar Box
Calendar Box
Spreadsheet Document Field
Table box
Picture box
No
No
No
No
No simple dragging is not possible.

Yes simple dragging is possible.
Spreadsheet
Document Field
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Table box
Picture box
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
47
Chapter 5. Operation in Forms
By dragging to the spreadsheet document, the field value is converted to text

presentation. Data that has the main presentation defined (for example, the code or
description for the catalog) is dragged as the main presentation value. For example,
data from the calendar field has the Date value type and is converted in the string
according to the current regional settings. If the values table data is displayed in the
table box, the ValueTableRow text is placed in the spreadsheet document field.
By dragging data within the table box, note that the order of lines cannot be changed
in dynamic lists. You can transfer hierarchical data only from one group to another.
In the table box containing static data (tabular parts, values tables, values lists,
values tree), you can change the order of the lines.
If dragging events processing is provided by configuring, you should look for information about this possibility in the description of working with the configuration.
Besides dragging between controls, the 1C:Enterprise allows you to drag data from
other applications to controls. The text and file list are dragged.
5.3. Fields
Fields are intended to view, enter and edit various types of data. To enter a value
into a field, locate your cursor over the field, left-click it, and enter the value
(normally you either type it from your keyboard or select it from the drop-down
list).
5.3.1. Text Box

The methods used to work with an text box depend on the type of data that are
edited or viewed in the form element as well as on the settings specified in the
configuration.
Fig. 31. Sample form with text boxes
Normally to enter some data into a field, it is sufficient to left-click the area of the
field and enter the required data from the keyboard. You can also edit a character
string using operating system tools, e.g. the clipboard.
When you select a value for a field from the drop-down list, automatic selection of
values is activated.
48
Red underline means that the field is required.

Shadowed background of a field means that either the field is filled automatically
or it is not recommended to fill the field manually (for example, the Code field on
fig. 31 is filled automatically during recording). If you attempt to manually edit the
value of such a field, a warning will be displayed.
Pressing F4 enables selecting an item from a list (see fig. 32) as a form attribute.
Fig. 32. Selecting a group of contractors from a list
The keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Shift+F4 opens the form of the selected element.
Fig. 33. Opening a form of the selected element from an text box
Shaded background of a text box (similar to that shown for the Code field
on fig. 33) means that you should not edit the value in the field.
If multiline mode is enabled for a text box, pressing Enter will not switch
to the next form element and will instead begin a new line in the same text box.
Enhanced entry mode can be enabled for a multiline text box. In this case you can
use tab character and standard text search. Note that switching to another control
of the form using the Tab key is disabled in this mode.
If atext box has a limited size and data is pasted from the clipboard, only the portion
of the initiate text will be taken from the clipboard that fits the available space
(or the highlighted text).
49
5.3.1.1. String
If an text box is connected to string data, it will look as follows:
Fig. 34. Sample string text box
5.3.1.2. Number
If an text box is connected to some numeric data (for example, a number or a sum),
the selection button will look as a calculator and the value in the field can be edited
using the calculator displayed when the button is clicked.
Fig. 35. Using a calculator to enter a number into an text box
It is also possible to define a value using a spin button.

Fig. 36. Editing a value of an text box with a slider
If you enter invalid data into a field and attempt to switch to another form control or
close the form, a warning will be displayed. Incorrect data entered into field. When
you click K, the software will prompt you to correct such invalid data.
5.3.1.3. Date
If a text box is intended to enter a date, it will either display dots or colons as separators depending on the settings.
You can also use the built-in calendar to enter a date:
Fig. 37. Entering a date into a text box using the calendar
If a text box contains both date and time and only the date is displayed (or only the
date and partial time), if you edit the date in the text box, the remaining portion
of the time value will remain unchanged after such editing.
50
If you enter invalid data into a field and attempt to switch to another form control or
close the form, a warning will be displayed. Incorrect data entered into field. When
you click K, the software will prompt you to correct such invalid data.
5.3.1.4. Various Data Types

In addition to the above types of an attribute values, you can also use values from
the filled in lists to enter a value into a form. If a forms attribute does not have
the value that belongs to one of the so-called "primitive types" (numbers, strings,
dates), the text box for such an attribute (or the selection field) will include the
Select button. Clicking the button will display the list of items belonging to this
type for you to select the required value.
Fig. 38. Entering data of an arbitrary type
In this window you should select the required element type name. In the list of data
that opens select the required value.
Sometimes you can select the value without opening a dedicated window, in a
list that pops up when you click the selection button next to the attribute you are
editing.
Fig. 39. Text box with a pop-up list
This is possible for lists containing a moderate number of values. In this situation it
is impossible to edit values or add new values.
Tip
You can also press F4 to select a control while Ctrl+Shift+F4 keyboard shortcut
will open the form of the selected control.
Selecting the value. You can select the required line in a list by double clicking it.
You can also use all the features used for operations with a list in addition to simply
selecting a value: enter a new value, edit, delete, rearrange groups (for hierarchical
lists), etc.
51
Using the Keyboard to Enter Data into an Text box

Another way to fill into a field is to type the data from the keyboard.
When you complete typing the text or make a pause, a selection list is displayed.
When more than 50 items are identified for the list, the warning will be displayed.
If you select an object marked for deletion in the field, the specific warning will be
displayed as well.
If no object corresponds to the text entered, the system offers three possible actions:
select from the list, continue or cancel data entry. If you press Cancel entry, the
value in the text box is restored to the initial one.
NOTE
You cannot enter text for attributes of undefined types (for example, of the composite type) unless you specify a specific data type.
Declining the Selected Value

In order to clear the value selected from a list, click the Clear button located to the
right from the attribute field (if the button is defined during configuration development) or press Shift+F4.
Fig. 40. Text box with a clear button
5.3.2. Check box

A Check box control is intended to enable or disable a certain value.
Check boxes with two or three states may be used.
Fig. 41. Sample check box in a form
If a checkbox in a table column or a form is disabled, it is displayed differently.

To toggle the value of a check box, click it or if you use your keyboard you should
first activate it using Tab or Shift+Tab and press the Spacebar.
If a check box has two states, you can also use the + (plus) and - (minus) keys to
toggle it.
5.3.3. Radio Button

The Radio Button form control is intended to select one of multiple possible values.
The required value is selected using your mouse. If you use your keyboard, you
should first activate the currently selected value of the radio button using Tab
52
or Shift+Tab, select the required value using the arrow keys and press Enter. For
example, a form of a good provides for selection of the type of goods:
Fig. 42. Type of goods radio button
5.4. Progress Bar

The progress bar only designates the current state of associated form attribute (it is
specified during designing of the configuration).
Fig. 43. Progress bar
5.5. Slider
You can use the Slider for quick and vivid input of numeric values. Its appearance
is similar to an ordinary scroll bar placed vertically or horizontally on a picture
under the associated text box.
Fig. 44. Value adjustment slider
The value of the associated attribute is determined by the slider's position and by
the minimum and maximum values specified during designing of the configuration.
You can move the slider using the arrow keys but it is more convenient to use the
mouse.
5.6. Hyperlink
A form may contain controls that are formatted as text but when you hover the
mouse cursor over this text, the cursor will change to a hand (see fig. 45) and the
text will be underlined. This control is named a Hyperlink. The control is intended to
switch to a specific object (e.g. to open other forms). To select a hyperlink, click it
or activate it using Tab or Shift+Tab and press Enter. Designing of a configuration
defines hyperlinks behavior when they are clicked on. Pictures located in forms can
also have hyperlinks. When you mouse-over a hyperlinked picture, the cursor will
change to the one shown on shown on fig. 45.
Fig. 45. Hyperlink in a form
5.7. Button
Buttons in a form are used to perform some actions specified by the form algorithm.
To select a button, click it or activate it using Tab or Shift+Tab and press Enter.
53
One of the buttons in a form can be predefined, and you can press it not only by
clicking but also by pressing Ctrl+Enter.
For some buttons, other keyboard shortcuts may be provided that enable the user to
select them without using the mouse and without reaching it by tabbing through the
form controls.
For some buttons a pressing display mode can be specified. These buttons are used
to enable or disable some mode.
5.8. Table
A form may contain a table that is intended to view a list containing multiple
columns. The assortment of columns depends on the purpose of the specific form.
The rows contain the data that you can view and edit in some cases. An example is
a nomenclature list in the Sales document.
Fig. 46. List of goods in the sales document
In some forms, columns are located so that their values in each table row are
displayed on two or more levels. This allows to display more information in a row
simultaneously without horizontal scrolling of the table.
Adding, copying, deleting, editing, sorting, filtering and other actions on data
contained in a list are generally performed using the list command bar buttons or
using commands of the context menu opened in the list area (if such actions are
provided for during configuration development).
Methods of working with a table depend on the type of data being edited or
displayed in the form control as well as on the settings specified in the configuration
or determined by the 1C:Enterprise script. These methods generally match those
rules used to work with an text box. To begin editing a cell, press Enter or highlight
the cell and begin editing. To complete editing a row of a table, press Shift+F2.
54
Viewing a table. You can use your mouse and keyboard to view a table.
For convenience of viewing a tables content, you can resize the width of columns.
To do so, hover the cursor over the column border so that its form changes and leftclick the border. Select the required column width by moving the mouse, and then
release the mouse button. The selected column sizes are saved. Holding the Ctrl key
while resizing the column width prevents the adjacent columns from been affected.
Use this method if there are no titles for some system lists.
If the column width prevents you from seeing the entire field content, you can view
it using the following actions. Place the cursor over the required column in the row
you need and the entire content of the field will be displayed near the cursor.
You can change the column order when viewing the table. If you need to specify
an order for the columns, use form customization procedure described on the page
204.
In some tables you can select multiple rows of a list. Holding Ctrl key down, select
the required rows with your mouse or arrow keys.
Editing a tables cell. To edit a tables attribute, highlight the cell containing this
attribute and begin editing. To complete editing of a cell, press Enter.
Inserting a row. To insert a new row into a table, press Ins. The new cell of the row
automatically switches to editing mode. Pressing Enter after you specify a value for
the attribute switches the cursor to the next cell.
Note
If the cursor "jumps over" some cells when you enter a row in a table and press
Enter, this means that the configuration specifies for these table columns to be
skipped.
Deleting a row. To delete a row of a table, highlight the row using the arrow keys
or your mouse and press Del.
Warning!
The rows are deleted without any additional warning.
Copying a row. A new row can be added to a table by copying an existing one.
To do so, select the template row using arrow keys or your mouse and press F9.
This will add a new row to the table. This row will be filled with the values copied
from the template row.
Numbers of rows. The leftmost column of a table contains the numbers of the
rows. When a new row is added to a table, it is automatically assigned the next
sequence number.
A form can have an order for the table rows defined. At that rows can be moved up
and down. To move the rows, use the Move Up and Move Down commands. When
rows are moved, their numbers are changed automatically.
55
Sorting of table rows. Rows in a table can be sorted randomly if it is provided for
in the configuration. You can sort rows by data of any columns by selecting the
column and using All Actions Sort Descending or Sort Ascending.
If you need to specify a more complex order table elements, use form customization
procedure described on the page 204.
5.9. Groups
In the software it is possible to join various form elements into groups. Groups
can include fields, columns of a list, pages, commands. Columns of a list can also
be joined into vertical or horizontal groups. In the example below you can see the
following vertical group of columns in a list on a form:
Fig. 47. Groups of list columns
Elements in a form can be visually arranged into groups. A group can be separated
with a line or a frame. For example, as shown in the figure below:
Fig. 48. Groups of fields in a form
You can move the form elements between groups. The system defines if such a
movement is possible. If the movement requires some properties of an element to
be changed, the changes will be applied automatically. For example, if you move
a group of elements to a group with the Pages view, the property View will be
changed from Standard group to Page. If this causes changes in requirements to
subordinate elements, these elements are either changed automatically or deleted.
For details on form customization, see "Form Setup" on the page 147.
5.9.1. Command Bar

A form can contain the groups of controls of the Command Bar type. Every
command bar consists of a set of buttons (commands) that are effective only for
this given form or a specific portion of the form.
Use keyboard shortcut Alt+F10 to activate a command bar. The panel cannot be
selected when you switch between form controls using Tab or Shift+Tab. All the
buttons are tabbed through and the action is applied by clicking a button of the
panel (pressing Enter).
56
5.9.2. Pages
A form may include pages if it is provided for in the configuration. Page tabs may
be displayed vertically (from top to bottom) or horizontally (from left to right) from
the page content.
Left-click the required page to select it. You can also switch between pages using
Ctrl+PgUp (next) or Ctrl+PgDn.
Every page may include its own form controls. For example, the Invoice document
form may include a tab named Goods that will include the list of goods and another
tab named Other containing a field for additional description of the shipment (as
shown on fig. 49).
Fig. 49. Pages in the invoice document
5.10. Chart
A chart can be nested in a form or a spreadsheet document.
You can manage a chart nested in a form. Customize it using the attributes available in the form (the assortment is determined during configuration development).
You can select another type of chart if source data allows. For details on working
with a chart in a spreadsheet document, see "Working with Charts" in the Appendix
named "Spreadsheet Document Editor" available in the electronic version of the
documentation.
5.11. Text Document Field

A text document field is used to work with texts. It includes a window of the text
editor intended to enter and save lines of text. For details on working with the
editor, see Appendix named Text Document Editor (available in the electronic form
of the documentation).
5.12. HTML Document Field

An HTML document field is intended to view an HTML document in a form. When
you view the information available in the field, you can navigate by links (if any).
The following commands are available for the field: Print, Preview, Save As, Save
Copy.
57
5.13. Graphical Schema Field

A Graphical Schema Field form control is intended to view and edit a graphical
schema.
Editing of graphical schemas is described in Appendix 4 Graphical Schema Editor
(available in the electronic version of the documentation).
The order for tabbing the schema elements is specified during configuration development.
You can select the scale to view a graphical schema using the Graphical Schema
Scale menu item.
You can also change scale using a mouse with scroll wheel by pressing and holding
Ctrl.
This field supports display of common route maps of business processes or route
maps of particular instances of business processes, taking passed and active route
points into account.
A route map of the sales business process can be quoted as an example of displaying
a route map in a graphical schema.
Fig. 50. Graphical schema of a route map
The passed points of a route are displayed with shaded background (Billing on the
figure). A route point is considered to be passed when all the tasks associated with
the point have been performed.
Active points are framed with a red dashed line. A route point is considered to be
active when it has one or more incomplete tasks associated (Bill approval on the
figure).
58
5.14. Picture Field

The Picture Field element is used to place various images in the form. This element
can also contain a link (see the "Hyperlink" description).
In some situations when the picture does not fit in the field, scroll bars are displayed
when you select the element. These scroll bars make it possible to view the entire
picture (if it is provided for in the configuration). If scroll bars are available, you
can also move the picture using the arrow keys, Home (show top left corner), End
(show bottom right corner), PgUp (go up by window size vertically or horizontally
if Alt is held down), and PgDn (go down by window size vertically or horizontally
if Alt is held down).
If your mouse has a scroll wheel, you can scroll the image vertically by rotating
the wheel forward (up) and backward (down). If you press Shift while scrolling, the
picture will be scrolled horizontally.
The Picture Field element of a form will have a context menu with the following
options: Copy, Save As, View Picture.
The Copy menu item copies the picture to the clipboard for subsequent paste into
another application.
The Save As menu is available for the pictures loaded from files. Use it to save a
picture as a file on the disk.
If you select the View Image command, the window for viewing the picture will be
displayed. This window includes buttons to zoom in and out and to select actual
size. The window can be resized. Use the Zoom In, Zoom Out, and Original Size
menu items to select the required scale. You can also use the NumPad keys to
change scale as well. Pressing + (plus) zooms in while pressing (minus) zooms
out. The Original Size command selects the actual size of the picture.
Please note that the picture should be "in focus" for all the actions executed with
your mouse; this means that you should first click it. If you click one of the buttons,
this button will be in focus and further mouse actions (scrolling and scaling) will be
disabled until the focus is switched back to the picture itself again.
You can also change scale using a mouse with a scrolling wheel by pressing and
holding Ctrl. To zoom in, rotate the wheel forward, and to zoom out, rotate it backward. You can also change scale using + (plus) and (minus) keys located to the
right of the NumPad.
5.15. Spreadsheet Document Field

A form can contain a nested spreadsheet document (the Spreadsheet Document
Field element). For details on working with the Spreadsheet Document Field, see
Appendix 3 supplied in electronic version of the documentation.
59
Navigating in spreadsheets. A spreadsheet document window always displays

only a portion of the spreadsheet located in the window. Use your mouse to select a
cell of the spreadsheet. The selected cell is activated. Use scroll bars to display the
areas that did not fit in the window.
Tip
To scroll a document horizontally, press and hold Shift and use the mouse scroll
wheel.
For convenient scrolling of a large document, you can press the mouse wheel and
select the scrolling direction with your cursor. The scrolling speed depends on the
distance between the current cursor location and the location where the mouse
wheel was pressed (specifically designated).
Managing a spreadsheet view. Use the Table View submenu items to configure
view of various areas and components of a spreadsheet document: column and row
headers, grid, etc.
Let us briefly describe the View menu items. Every menu item works as a radio
button: when an item is selected (pressed), the corresponding area is displayed or
hidden.
Menu item
Dock the table
Show grid
Show Headers
Show Groups
Edit
Show comments
Black and white view
Page view mode
Scale
Action
Locks the top rows and left columns of a spreadsheet document so that
they will always be displayed when the document is paged through
Toggles display of the spreadsheet grid (thin lines that separate cells)
Manages display of the row and column headers in a spreadsheet document
Shows and hides groups the areas to the left of the row header or above
the column header
Locks or unlocks spreadsheet documents for changes
Toggles display of comments
Toggles display of colors specified for the spreadsheet document. When
this item is selected (checked in the menu), all the colors will be defined
by Microsoft Windows operating system settings
Toggles display of a minimum number of rows (depends on the entered
information), print area, page breaks
Performs a discrete image scale. When this item is selected, a submenu
opens that you can use to select the desired scale for the spreadsheet
document
Tip
Scale can also be changed using a mouse with a scroll wheel. Press and hold Ctrl
and rotate the mouse wheel. Turn the wheel forward to zoom in or backward to
zoom out.
60
Docking a table (headers). In the 1C:Enterprise spreadsheet editor, the top rows
and left columns of a spreadsheet document may be locked so that they are always
displayed when scrolling through the document.
To dock the top rows of a spreadsheet document, highlight the entire row and select
the Table View Dock the Table menu item. All the rows above the highlighted
one will be docked.
To lock spreadsheet columns, select the entire spreadsheet column. All the columns
to the left of the selected one will be docked.
To lock spreadsheet rows and columns simultaneously, highlight one cell of the
spreadsheet. All the rows and columns to the top and left of the highlighted cell
respectively will be locked.
To unlock the locked elements, select Dock the Table again.
Setting as read-only. To prevent a spreadsheet document from editing, use Table
View Edit menu item (this item should be unchecked).
If a cell contains the text that does not completely fit in the visible area, on mouseover the text is displayed as a tooltip. If the text is too large to fit in a tooltip, only
part of the text will be shown.
5.16. The Formatted Document Field

A form may have a Formatted document field element used for storing text
documents with the following formatting: color highlighting, text font changes,
hyperlinks, pictures, etc.
This field may be used to create an e-mail message or edit a simple html document.
If a formatted document field is in View only mode, the user may navigate the links
in the document. Navigation is performed in a new browser window.
The main menu File Save and Save As commands help save formatted documents
as text files or html documents.
Documents can be formatted with the commands in the command bar of the document being formatted.
Below is a short description of formatting options.
Changing Fonts
There are two ways to change the font in a document.
Select the Font menu option and then choose the font, font size and style (Bold,
Underlined, Italic, Crossed out) in the Select font dialog, then press OK.
Select the text for which you want to change the font and increase or decrease
the font size incrementally using the toolbar commands, and then select the font
style (bold, italic or underlined).
61
Selecting Text and Background Colors

1C:Enterprise allows you to highlight the text with a background color or text color.
To do this, select the text and choose Change background color on the toolbar (to
change the background color of the text) or Change text color (to change the color
of the text itself). Select the color in the Choose color dialog and press OK.
Inserting a Hyperlink
Formatted document text may contain hyperlinks.
Select an object (text or picture) and choose the Insert hyperlink menu command.
The formatting dialog is then displayed on the screen. Specify the hyperlink address
in the Hyperlink field and press OK.
You can format the selected object in the style normally used for hyperlinks, which
is blue underlined text.
Inserting a Picture
You can also include pictures in a formatted document.
To insert an image file, select the Insert picture command and choose the file you
want in the standard file selection dialog.
Inserting Symbols
Use the Insert symbol command to add symbols from the list into a text.
Inserting a List
Use the Bulleted list option to start a bulleted list, or the Numbered list option to
start a numbered one. Then enter the text.
To add the following element to the list, press Enter.
To end the list, press Enter twice or press Backspace to delete the last bullet or
number in the list.
Alignment Setup
The text may be aligned to the left or right margins. A justified alignment (i.e., to
both the left and right margins) may also be used.
Select the text you want to align and press Left / Right / Center / Justified.
Indented Text
You can increase or decrease indention for one or several text passages from the
edge of the field.
Select the text and press Increase indent to increase indention, or Decrease indent
to decrease it.
62
Line Spacing
To set the line spacing, select the text and choose Line spacing. In the window that
opens enter the desired spacing with the keyboard or with the keys and press OK.
5.17. Managing a Form and Saving Settings

When numerous attributes are located in a form, the configuration can specify
for saving the sets of the attributes with their values to use them when required.
The commands Save Parameters and Restore Parameters are used for this.
Fig. 51. Commands to manage form parameters
Enter the required values for the form fields and select Save Parameters In the
Saving Parameters window that opens enter a name for the set of the parameters to
be saved and click Save.
Fig. 52. Saving form parameters
To use the form parameters that were earlier saved, select Restore Parameters item.
In the window that opens select a set of parameters and click Select.
Fig. 53. Selecting the saved form parameters
The parameters of the selected set will be used as the parameters for this form.
63
5.18. Specific Features of Some Forms

When you work in most forms, you can call any software functions (using the main
menu, commands and actions of the navigation panel, toolbar buttons, keys) and
switch to other open windows. But some forms do not allow this. For example, the
main is not available while a form is opened. So you should complete all required
actions in such a form and close it before you can call other modes. You also can
close the form by pressing Esc.
In addition to normal forms, a configuration can operate spreadsheet and text documents.
64
Chapter 6
Lists
Various lists are most frequently used in 1C:Enterprise to display information.
Fig. 54. The list of sales of goods documents and the command bar
If this is not prohibited in a specific configuration or for a specific user, a list can be
edited on the fly: new entries can be added while the existing ones can be edited or
removed.
Lists are managed in two forms: list form and item selection form.
To switch to a form containing a list of objects, you should normally select the
respective link of the navigation panel.
A list is only opened in the selection form when you enter a form attribute value by
clicking the selection button or pressing F4. Various forms for selecting items and
folders may be defined in the configuration.
Normally a selection form provides for locating the cursor in the required list item
and press Enter to select the current item as the value for the edited attribute or
to create a new object. In a list form pressing Enter for the current item opens an
editing form. You can change the software behavior for when Enter is pressed
during configuration development.
66
6.1. Viewing a List

General methods used to work with tables are also applicable to viewing lists. These
methods are described in details in "Table" on the page 71.
Fig. 55. Form of the goods list
A list form is usually a table displaying a list of items. The assortment of

the columns in the table is defined in the configuration.
The assortment and positions of the columns in a table may vary. That is, a configuration may provide for multiple visual representations of the same list.
Left-clicking a column of a list will sort the information in the list by the value
in the column.
A user can customize the assortment of the displayed columns using AllActions
Change Form menu item. The procedure of forms customization is described
in "Form Setup" on the page 147.
If a list contains numerous items (rows) and columns, only a part of the list is
displayed in the form with scroll bars available at the bottom and on the right of the
list.
Both items and folders of a list can be marked for deletion. They are usually marked
with struck out icons in the leftmost column of the list.
Resizing column height in the lists is recorded. The size is saved and is used when
the window is next opened. If a list is opened in a new window, the width of the
columns is saved accompanied by the size and location of the window itself.
6.1.1. Hierarchical Lists

You can use the 1C:Enterprise platform to manage hierarchical lists having an
unlimited number of nested levels (the limitation can be applied during configuration development).
67
Chapter 6. Lists
Hierarchical lists include items belonging to various levels with the items of the
lower levels subordinating to those of the higher levels. There are two types of
hierarchy of lists: hierarchy of folders and items and hierarchy of items. A specific
type is defined in the configuration.
A list that has hierarchy of groups and items includes two types of items: folders
and the items themselves. A folder is a node that includes other (subordinate)
groups and items. An item is a specific object.
In the lists with hierarchy of items any item can be both a node and an individual object.
A list of departments can be quoted as an example. Every department may include
other departments but all the departments will have the same assortment of properties.
A hierarchical list has the following view modes: hierarchical list, list, tree.
The modes are switched using All Actions View Mode menu item.
The current view mode is designated by a clicked icon (this icon has a frame next
to the menu item).
List Mode. If you select List as a view mode, the form will display all the items of
the list. Folders and items are displayed together without separation.
Fig. 56. List view mode
Hierarchical List Mode. If the Hierarchical List mode is enabled for items having
a hierarchy of folders and items, only the top level items are displayed, while only
items that are subordinate to a folder are shown when you switch to this folder.
Fig. 57. Contractors list in the hierarchical list mode

Hidden folder a row corresponds to a folder of items. Left-clicking this icon
will expand the folder so that you could switch to management of items included
in the folder.
68
Expanded folder the row contains the name of the folder opened for viewing.
This row is always located in the top of the table, right under the column headers
of the list. Left-clicking the icon in the row collapses the folder.
List item the row is an item of the list.
A folder in a list can be expanded in one of the following ways:
double-clicking the line in the list that contains the name of the group;
left-clicking [+] in the line with the name of the group;
placing the cursor in the row containing the name of the desired folder and
pressing Ctrl+Down Arrow;
placing the cursor in the row containing the name of the folder and pressing +
on the NumPad;
placing the cursor in the row containing the name of the desired folder and
selecting All Actions Down one level.
To return to the previous level, you can press Ctrl+Up Arrow while in any row of
the folder or select All Actions Up one level.
Tree Mode. If you select Tree as the view mode, the items of the list will be
displayed as a tree.
Fig. 58. Hierarchical list in the tree mode
You can expand and collapse a tree for convenience. The + (plus) sign in the
branch node indicates that this branch can be expanded. Left-clicking this sign will
expand the next level of the branch for viewing and the + (plus) sign will switch
to - (minus). You can collapse a branch of a tree by clicking the - (minus) sign.
If a tree is expanded, use the Up Arrow and Down Arrow keys to move to the required
folder.
To expand a folder and simultaneously switch to a lower-level folder, use the
Ctrl+Down Arrow keyboard shortcut. To move to the parent folder, use Ctrl+Up
Arrow.
To collapse a tree node and all its subordinate nodes, use Shift+Alt+Num-.
To collapse all the tree nodes, use Ctrl+Shift+Alt+Num-.
To expand a tree node and all its subordinate nodes, use Shift+Alt+Num+.
69
Chapter 6. Lists
To expand all the tree nodes, use Ctrl+Shift+Alt+Num+.

Also in any view mode both a tree and a list can have a tree node expanded using
Num+ or collapsed using Num-.
To quickly navigate to the beginning or to the end of a list, you can use Home and
End keys, respectively.
The lists with hierarchy of items in the Tree mode are viewed similarly to viewing
the lists with hierarchy of folders and items. At that the icons used are the same for
the lists with hierarchy of items.
Fig. 59. List with hierarchy of items in the tree view mode
6.2. Creating a List Item

To create a new item, use All Actions Create command in the form of the list
or simply press Ins.
If a new item that is added to a hierarchical list should be located in a specific
folder of the list right away, you should switch to this folder before creating
the item (Hierarchical List or Tree mode should be enabled).
NOTE
If List view mode is selected for a hierarchical list, a new item will be created in
the root folder.
If an item form includes a Folder attribute, you can specify any other folder the
item should belong to irrespective of the mode and current folder.
When a new item is added to a list, the data is edited in a displayed editing form
(window) of this item.
The appearance of this window, its properties and behavior of the controls are
defined in the configuration.
General methods of working with a form are used to edit attributes of a list item.
Detailed information about these methods is provided in "General Techniques
of Working with Forms" on the page45.
Validity and completeness of the data can be verified when a user works in the
form that creates a list item. Error messages may be displayed in case of incorrect
input. When you are done entering the attributes, click Write and Close or another
similar button intended to save the results of editing to record the created item
70
in the list or close the form using the button intended to close the window. When
you are prompted to save changes, select Yes to record the newly created item to
the list or No not to save it.
Press Esc to cancel adding the new item to the list.
TIP
To add a new item to a list, use a command of the Create group of the action
panel.
6.2.1. Creating a Folder in a List

To create a new folder, use the All Actions Create Group menu item in the list
form.
If the newly created folder to be added to a list should be located in a specific folder
of this list, you should switch to this folder before adding the new one (Hierarchical
List or Tree mode should be enabled).
If the Folder attribute is available in the form used to add a new folder, you can
specify any other folder for the newly added folder to belong to irrespective of the
mode and current folder.
Similarly to creating a new list item, when you create a new folder, the attributes
of the folder are edited in the folder form displayed.
The system does not differentiate between the codes of list items or item folders;
that is, folder codes and item codes cannot coincide.
Otherwise the methods of adding a list folder and editing it are the same as those
used to create an item.
6.2.2. Copying a List Item

A new item or a folder can be added to a list by copying an existing item or folder.
To do so, locate the cursor in the row containing the item or folder to be used as a
template and select All Actions Copy.
This will display the form intended to create a new item. At that all the attributes
will be copied from the attributes of the template item. If automatic code assignment is not specified for the list, the code of the new item will be copied from the
template item.
You can edit the attributes using the general rules described in "Editing List Items"
below.
6.3. Editing List Items

To edit an item, locate your cursor in any cell of the row that you want to edit
the attributes for, and press Enter or double-click anywhere in the row or press F2.
This will open the list item editing form where you can edit the required attributes.
Chapter 6. Lists
71
When a list item form is opened (or multiple forms are opened), the list form is
still available for operations in the application window: you can add new items and
folders, delete them or move items from one folder to another that is, you can use
all the operations with lists provided by the software.
If a list is read-only, the information in the opened form will not be available for
editing.
6.3.1. List Rearrangement

When you work with hierarchical lists, you may need to rearrange the items of a
list, i.e. to move items or folders of items from one folder to another.
To move an item or a folder to another folder of the list:
1. Highlight the row in the list that contains the item or the folder that should be
moved to another location of the list.
2. Select All Actions Move to folder.
3. In the dialog that opens select the folder where you want the selected item to be
located.
TIP
List elements may be dragged between the groups with a mouse. Please note that
there is no way to drag an element to the parent group in a hierarchical list.
If the configuration supports unique list item codes, the code of the moved item
must be different from the codes of the items that already exist in the destination
folder. If the codes match, the following message is displayed: <Field name> field
value not unique. At that, you need to correct the code of the moved item.
6.3.2. Selecting a Value from a List

A list can be opened to select an item from this list. In this situation, a list is opened
by clicking the selection button or by pressing F4 when an attribute is entered from
a list.
When a list is opened to select a value, the window of the list may be somewhat
different from that displayed when it is simply opened (e.g. the assortment and position of columns in the list may be different, a folder tree may be absent or located
in a different position, etc). You can create various forms for different modes of
working with lists. As a rule, a selection form contains the minimum required information; it frequently consists only of the name and code columns (see fig. 60).
The item selection form supports the same actions that are available in the list form:
adding new items to a list, editing additional attributes of the existing list items,
moving items to other folders (if the window contains a folder tree), etc.
72
Fig. 60. Selecting an attribute value from a list
For example, if a list of companies does not have the company you need, you can
enter it right here and select it immediately to use as a document attribute. You can
also edit some attributes of an existing company (if this is available for a specific
user).
NOTE
Please note that the Enter key behavior has major differences in different forms.
In a selection form, pressing Enter results in selecting and closing the required
item (unless otherwise specified in the configuration), while in the forms of lists it
results in opening the form to view and edit it. To edit a list item in the selection
form, use commands of the All Actions menu or F2.
Information in the selection form is synchronized with that available in the list form
so all the changes that you make in one window will be reflected in the other one.
To select a list item, you should locate the cursor in the row with the desired item
and press Enter or click the Select button on the command bar (if it is provided for
in the configuration).
For the hierarchical lists in the forms of items you can specify a folder this item
belongs to (if it is provided for in the configuration).
For some attributes you can select both items and folders. You can use the standard
selection method, by holding the Shift key down to select a folder quickly.
Tip
The selection form is not actually required to select data from a list. It is sufficient to type the code or begin typing the name of the required item in the text
box. Codes are particularly convenient when such codes are frequently used and
are easy to remember (e.g. the numbers of departments) or are available in the
primary documents (e.g. a part number or barcode for some goods).
73
Chapter 6. Lists
6.3.2.1. Predefined List Items

A list may have predefined items (if it is provided for in the configuration). These
items are added during configuration development and cannot be deleted in the
1C:Enterprise mode. You can only edit attributes of such items.
6.3.3. Search in Lists

There are several ways of searching for the required information in a list. They are
described below.
6.3.3.1. Quick Search

To quickly switch to the desired row in a list, you can use quick search mode.
To perform a quick search, simply begin typing the desired value on your
keyboard.
This will automatically open the normal search window with the value displayed in
the field named What to search.
Fig. 61. Search window
To search non-exact matches for reference-type attributes in the Where to Search

field, select a name of an attribute marked with (by string).
The Search within results checkbox will become available during the search. If you
select this checkbox, you will be able to search within the results of the previous
search.
Search results will be displayed in the current work area as a flat list.
To return to the previous state of the list, click Cancel search or press Ctrl+Q.
6.3.3.2. Custom Search

You can search within any column of a list.
To carry out a custom search:
1. Click Find in the command bar or press Ctrl+F.
2. Specify search criteria in the search dialog.
3. Click Find in the Find dialog.
74
This will display all the rows meeting the specified conditions in the current
window. If no such rows can be identified, the list will be empty.
To return to the previous data presentation, use the Cancel search command or
press Ctrl+Q.
What to search field is intended to enter the value of the data type contained in
the column selected in the Where to search field. Search by a substring is used for
rows (if the entered search string is shorter than the field to be searched in) while
the attributes containing a date can have search by date without accounting for
time used. Exact match is searched for the remaining values. To search non-exact
matches for reference-type attributes in the Where to Search field, select the name
of an attribute marked with (by string).
If hierarchical data is displayed in a list, you can search for data taking their hierarchy into account (Search in folders parameter): in the entire list (In all groups),
In the current group and the child groups or In the current folder without the child
groups.
If you select Current folder and subfolders, search will be carried out in the data of
the currently opened folder and its subfolders.
If you select Current folder without subfolders, search will only be carried out in the
data of the opened folder while the data of the subfolders will be ignored.
Search history is stored for the user to be able to use the previously searched for
values by selecting them from the dropdown list of the What to search field.
6.4. List Customization

You can customize the order of columns in a list, their visibility and the behavior
of the list when data is opened and managed, in the Form Customization dialog.
The dialog is opened using All Actions Change Form command. For details on
form customization, see "Form Setup" on the page 147.
Customization of data display, sorting of a list rows, grouping of a list in a table
and list layout is carried out in the List Options dialog. The dialog is opened using
All Actions Configure List command.
This dialog is intended to customize:
List filtering
The fields to order by
The fields to group the data by
Conditional appearance of the list
The settings are displayed in the lists arranged in four tabs of the window. A setting
is applied to a list if it is checked. You can specify the order for elements of one
setting to be applied.
Chapter 6. Lists
75
You can customize data display in the list same as you customize the report variant
in the data composition system.
Click K to apply a setting.
6.4.1. Filter
To apply a filter to a list, select the value for the filter on the Filter tab of the list
customization dialog. To do so, select the Value column in the item row and click
Select or press F4.
Fig. 62. List customization filter
To add a filter item, click Add or drag the required field from the Available fields
list.
Select Comparison type in the list that pops up when you click Select in the
Comparison type column.
If required, you can define an order for the criteria to be applied to the list. This is
done using Move up and Move down buttons of the command bar.
To apply a filter to a list, click OK.
For details on using filters and the comparison types, see "Filter" section on the
page116.
6.4.2. Sorting
To apply sorting to a list, select a value on the Sort tab of the customization dialog
or simply check an existing sorting item (see fig. 63).
To add a sorting item, click Add or drag a field from the Available fields list and
select Sort direction (ascending/descending).
If required, specify an order for the sorting items using Move up and Move down
buttons.
76
Fig. 63. Adjusting a list sorting
If there are several sorting fields in the list, data will be sorted by the first, second,
etc. fields.
To apply a sorting to a list, click OK.
For details on using sorting, see "Sorting" on the page119.
NOTE
It is impossible to sort lists by the fields that contain unlimited length strings.
6.4.3. Group
To join records in a list into a group, add a field to group by on the Group tab.
If multiple fields are selected, the records in the list will be grouped in succession
in the order specified for the fields of the group.
Click OK to apply a group setting.
Fig. 64. Adjusting a list grouping
Chapter 6. Lists
77
NOTE
It is impossible to group lists by the fields that contain unlimited length strings.
6.4.4. Conditional Appearance

Use conditional appearance elements to arrange a list.
To create an element of conditional appearance, click Add on the Conditional
Appearance tab. Elements of conditional appearance are edited in a separate
window.
Select the required appearance parameters on the Appearance tab: background
color, font color, etc.
Specify the condition for formatting to be applied to the fields on the Condition
tab. A condition is specified in the same manner as it is for filter.
On the Formatted fields tab from the list of available fields select those fields for
appearance to be applied to if the condition is satisfied.
If required, define the order for the used appearance elements with Move up and
Move down buttons.
The order of appearance elements defines the sequence for appearance to be applied
to report elements. If two different appearances apply to a report area, the one that
is the last in the list of conditional appearance elements is applied.
For details on customization of conditional appearance, see "Conditional Appearance" on the page119.
Click OK to apply a conditional appearance settings.
6.4.4.1. Saving Settings between Sessions

The settings of sorting and grouping are not saved between sessions. For example,
if a user customized sorting of a list and closed application, records in the list will
be sorted by default when the user restarts the software.
The settings of conditional appearance are always saved. This means that if a conditional appearance is customized once, it will be applied to the list subsequently.
The selected settings of a filter are added to the settings available in the list of filter
settings defined in the configuration but they will not be used until the user checks
them to be used in the created filter setting row.
6.4.5. Visibility Interval

For some lists it is possible to limit the displayed data to a specific period.
The interval is specified in the Period setting dialog opened using All Actions Set
date range.
78
Fig. 65. Customization of a period in a list
By default, the data in a list are displayed without any limitation by period and the
Date period parameter has the value Without limitations.
To define a custom date range, select Custom period in the Date range list and
specify the start and end dates in the fields From: and To: as shown on fig. 65.
It is also possible to select one of the standard periods that also support automatic
tracking of date changes. For example, if you select Today as the standard period
on the 12th of May, 2009, the next day the filter will still be valid because it will
point to the 13th of May, 2009.
If you check Use this period setting at startup, the form will be opened with the
selected visibility interval.
6.5. Print List

To export a list to a text or spreadsheet document, select All Actions Output List.
In the dialog that opens, select the type of the document and the required columns.
Fig. 66. List output customization dialog
If the list supports multiple row selection, you can use this dialog to only print the
selected rows (Selected only check box).
If a hierarchical list is displayed in a table, in the dialog box you can specify the
mode of printing data with all the subordinate folders and items (With subordinates
check box).
Chapter 7
Management
of Various Data Types
This chapter covers features used to manage such data as documents and document
journal as well as information on specific properties of infobase objects.
7.1. Item Numbering

One of the required attributes of a configuration object is its code (number for
documents).
Depending on the configuration, an item code can be assigned automatically or
manually when the item is created.
If automatic numbering is defined for a specific object, when the item is saved, the
code (number) text box will contain the code (number) generated by the software.
This code (number) can be edited but the software will verify that this new code
(number) does not match any of the codes (numbers) for objects of the same type
that already exist in the system.
If the system identifies that this code (number) has already been used, a warning
will be displayed.
Prefix. A prefix of code (number) can be specified for a configuration object. So when
an item is created, the subsequent code (number) will be suggested based on the rules
of automatic code (number) assignment with the specified prefix as well. However,
you can completely change the suggested code (number), including its prefix.
7.2. Adding an Element Based On

1C:Enterprise supports creation of new items based on existing data.
This allows you to raise an invoice using the information from a previously created
invoice.
80
The order for the specific attributes of the template object to be moved to a copied
object is defined when such objects are created during configuration development.
You can get information about the possibility of a based-on object creation in the
configuration description.
To add an object based on another object, select a template object in the list, use
Create Based On item of the command bar and choose the type of the created
object in the dropdown submenu.
A form to create a new object of the selected type will be displayed where the
attributes will be filled with information copied from the source object.
When a document is created, it is assigned the next sequence number. The current
date will be used as the document date.
7.3. Deleting (Marking for Deletion) an Item (Folder)

There are two deletion modes: direct deletion and marking for deletion.
The particular users rights determine the availability of the modes. If direct deletion is permitted, the responsibility for any violation of infobase reference integrity
lies with the administrator who has authorized the use of this mode and the user
who has deleted the items referred to in the infobase.
As a rule, if it is defined in the specific configuration, the system maintains reference integrity of the infobase objects: in this mode direct deletion of some system
objects (such as documents) is not allowed; you can only set an object deletion
mark, but you cannot delete the object. The objects are only deleted when the
appropriate service procedure is carried out using Delete Marked Objects from the
All Features list if this operation is available to the specific end user.
To set a deletion mark for an item, place the cursor to the row containing the item
and select All Actions Mark/Unmark for deletion.
To unmark an item in a list for deletion, position the cursor in the row containing
the previously marked item and select All Actions Mark/Unmark for Deletion.
A conventional icon located in the leftmost column of the list will be changed.
The commands to mark and unmark for deletion may also be available in the forms
of objects from the All Actions menu.
IMPORTANT
When you mark a folder for deletion or unmark it, it applies to all the items
in the folder. The same rule applies to items of a subordinate list.
For details on deletion modes (direct deletion, marking and unmarking for deletion), see the document "1C:Enterprise8.2. Administrator guide".
7.4. Working with Data from External Sources

1:Enterprise supports data from external databases. Depending on the program
settings, data from external sources may be viewed, used in the reports and processed through a web client.
Chapter 7. Management of Various Data Types
81
The system administrator is able to define the general settings for connecting to an
external source.
A new connection must always be established w henever you try to access data
from an external source with no previously existing connection to it. Once such a
connection has been successfully established, the activity selected will continue.
If the connection parameters have not been specified, the program will display the
parameters setting dialog when trying to establish a connection.
Fig. 67. The external data source connection dialog
You are able to store the user name and password and use them in the future with
the correct authorization. To save the parameters, select the Remember checkbox.
After you have entered the data, the program connects to an external source and
displays the following message: Connection to an external data source established.
Please repeat action. You can continue working with data from an external source
afterwards.
7.5. Print Form of an Object

If during configuration development a print form is created for an object in addition
to the screen form of a dialog, the dialog for object editing usually contains a button
that results in generation of the form. This button is usually labeled Print, though it
may have any other similar label.
When you click Print (or use any other actions specified in the configuration
description), a print form is generated.
The generated print form may be opened in a new window of the standard
1C:Enterprise spreadsheet editor. If only part of the form is visible in the window, the
arrow keys and scroll bars can be used to display the remaining portion of the form.
If required, an automatically generated print form can be edited. The edit mode
should be enabled using Table View Edit item of the main menu.
An edited print form can be saved to the hard drive file. To do so, select File Save
or File Save As.
Working in the 1C:Enterprise spreadsheet editor is described in detail in the
Appendix 3 to this Manual (available in electronic version of the documentation).
To print a form directly, select File Print item of the main menu. The standard
print setup dialog will open. For details, see "Print Setup" in the Appendix 3.
82
7.6. Multiuser Operation

When multiple users work in the software, they may attempt to edit the same object.
In this case only the user who began editing before everyone else would be able
to complete editing of the object. When other users attempt to edit the object, a
warning will be displayed featuring the session number and computer name that
locked this object. For example:
Fig. 68. Object lock error
To edit a released object, you should reread it from the database.
7.7. Documents and Document Journals

In 1C:Enterprise information about companys business operations is recorded in
documents. Documents can be displayed in the lists of documents of the same type
or in journals. A journal is a list of documents of various types.
In general, a table of document journal always includes a column named Document
Type that lists names of the documents.
Fig. 69. 'Financial documents' document journal
83
As a rule, the leftmost column in a journal or list of documents is a service one.

It shows document status using various icons:
Fig. 70. Status of a document in a journal

Recorded the document has been saved (recorded) but has not been posted.
Posted the document has either been posted or posting is not supported for the
document.
For deletion the document has been marked for deletion.
7.7.1. Viewing Document Journal

To view document journals, use the general methods of working with lists. For
details on these methods, see "Viewing a List" on the page66.
If sorting by date mode is selected in a list of document journals, the records are
displayed in chronological order when the journal is displayed. The following rules
are applied in this situation:
the records in the journal are ordered by date,
the records of the same date are ordered by document time.
If sorting by date is disabled, the documents are displayed by the input order.
7.7.2. Adding a New Document from the Document Journal

If a journal displays documents of multiple types, when a new document is created
from the list form, you will be prompted to select the type of the document.
Fig. 71. Prompt to select a document type
This list will only include the names of the document types that are displayed in the
current journal.
If the appropriate command is provided for in the Create group of the action panel,
documents can be entered without opening a journal or list of documents.
In the list of document types, select the required type for the document and click
OK. Next a form for the newly created document will be displayed for you to
populate its attributes.
84
If a journal stores documents of a single type, the list of document types will not
be displayed; instead, the document attributes entry dialog box will be displayed
immediately.
7.7.3. Document Date and Time

Almost all the documents have fields to enter their dates and numbers.
Specifying the document time is an important specific feature of the 1C:Enterprise.
Documents are arranged chronologically and often they are processed in the
chronological order specified by the documents date and time. Thus, a documents
time is used not only to display the astronomic time when the document was input
into the system, but mostly to order the documents of the same date.
The date suggested by the system can be changed. When a document is recorded,
normally the current time is assigned.
7.7.4. Posting a Document

Posting a document is an action that reflects the document data in various
accounting mechanisms based on the data contained in the document. Postability
is a predefined property of a document. When a document is posted, the information contained in the document is recorded in various registers by creating register
records. Register records represent the information about how the register state
changes as a result of document posting.
When you click the button in the document form that is intended to post the document (usually it is Post and Close or Post), the document is posted and closed.
A posted document will be marked in the document journal with a special icon (see
fig. 72).
In some cases, when posting a document is attempted, a situation arises that
prevents the document from being posted. For example, when posting an invoice it
is discovered that there is an insufficient quantity of the required goods in the warehouse. A message will be displayed informing the user that the document cannot
be posted. In this situation the document will not be closed automatically. You can
edit the document and reattempt to post it.
To unpost a document, select All Actions Clear Posting. After a confirmation, the
icon next to the document will change (see fig. 72).
Fig. 72. Document posted status
85
When a document is unposted, unless otherwise defined in the configuration, all the
actions applied by the document during posting are cancelled.
An unposted document can be edited, recorded, posted (or not posted). The icon in
the leftmost column correctly reflects the current status of the document.
7.7.5. Unpostable Documents

Documents that are not intended to be posted in this configuration are not posted
but they are marked with the same icon in the lists of documents that is used for
posted documents. You cannot unpost unpostable documents (see fig. 73).
Fig. 73. List of unpostable documents
7.7.6. Viewing Document Register Records

To analyze the changes that a posted document has caused in the registers, a
configuration may specify for viewing of the register records. The way the register
records are viewed is specified in the configuration description.
The form used to view register records is a list. This list displays register records.
The assortment of columns in the list depends on the structure of the selected
register.
The form of viewing accumulation register records can be as follows:
Fig. 74. Accumulation register
86
The register list form always has two mandatory columns.

The Row number column may include the number of the record in the register
record set that is created when the document is processed.
The Period column features a special icon that demonstrates the nature of the
changes applied to this register. A + (plus) sign denotes an increase of the absolute value of the register dimension while - (minus) sign demonstrates a decrease.
In the above example, it is the + (plus) sign that shows that the quantity of goods
has increased.
7.8. Business Processes

Business processes in 1C:Enterprise are intended to combine individual operations into chains of interrelated actions, allowing specific goals to be achieved. For
example, the issuance of an invoice, acceptance of cash payment, and shipment of
goods from a warehouse can be combined into the Sale of goods business process.
Such chains of interrelated operations within a business process are presented in
the business process route map. A route map (flowchart) describes the logic of the
business process and its entire life cycle, from start to finish, in the form of a map
of the passing sequence for interrelated points in the process.
A route point reflects a stage in the life cycle of a business process, normally
involving performance of a single automatic or manual operation.
Tasks in 1C:Enterprise allow you to keep a record of jobs sorted by performer, and
reflect the progress of business processes through the flowchart. In addition to business processes, tasks can be created by other infobase objects or directly by users.
When a business process reaches any route point where actions of a specific
performer are defined, a task is generated (or multiple tasks for a group action).
When the performer marks the task as executed, the business process automatically
passes to the next route point in compliance with the flowchart. Thus, tasks are the
driving force for business processes.
The specific business processes and their interconnection with tasks are described
in the configuration description.
The general principles of working with business processes and tasks are similar to
working with other objects (for example, documents and lists), therefore we will
cover specific features in this Manual.
7.8.1. List of Business Processes

By default, a list of business processes displays the following information:
Date date and time of business process creation;
Number number (unique to a business process);
Started is a mark showing that the business process has been started;
87
Completed business process completion mark (all the tasks generated by the
business process have been executed);
Head task the task on the basis of which the business process has been
created.
The list of business processes Sale of goods may look as follows:
Fig. 75. List of business processes 'sale of goods'
Business process statuses are marked by the icons:
Fig. 76. Status of a business process
If a business process has not been started yet ( there are no tasks associated with
this process and the Started mark is not set), this icon is shown in black and white,
and not in color.
Completed a business process is considered to be completed when it reaches the
end point on the flowchart, with all corresponding tasks executed.
7.8.2. List of Tasks

By default, a list of tasks displays the following information:
Number number (unique to a task);
Name task name;
Date date and time of task creation;
Completed task completion mark;
Business process the business process that has generated this task;
Point the business process route point where the task was created.
In addition to the above data, it is possible to define additional columns to display
values of any other business process or task attributes.
88
Task statuses are marked by icons:
Fig. 77. Task status
7.8.3. Executing a Task

Task execution is an important stage of a business process life cycle. When a task is
executed, its business process passes to the next route point in compliance with the
flowchart, which results in generating new tasks within this business process.
To execute a task, select All Actions Completed for the required task from the task
form.
The system may provide for opening of additional windows during task execution,
for example, to display warning messages or to enter additional information. An
execution check can also be specified. This check can prohibit execution of a task
if certain conditions are not complied with (for example, if the document is not
approved or if a discount is not applied to an invoice).
The executed tasks are marked with a special icon and have the Completed check
box checked.
Chapter 8
Reports
Reports are used to obtain data from the 1C:Enterprise infobase.
In the 1C:Enterprise mode a user may generate a report with the suggested settings
or customize the settings. Experienced users may also develop their own report
variants.
The default appearance of a report form is shown below:
Fig. 78. Report form
To generate a report with the predefined settings, it is sufficient to click Generate

button on the report command bar.
If multiple variants are provided for a report, you will have to select the required
variant before this operation. This is done using Select variant button in the report
form. For details on working with variants, see "Report Variants" on the page92.
In order to customize a report settings, you can use either the quick settings field or
a dedicated dialog opened with the Setup... button. For details on the settings, see
"Using Quick Settings" and "Settings" below.
Once a reports result is generated by the system and exported to a spreadsheet
document, you can use the details mechanism. For details see "Working with
Report Details" on the page99.
90
Depending on the report settings, a report form may include the following
commands in the All Actions submenu:
Settings opens a form of settings;
Select setting opens the form to select a previously saved setting;
Save setting saves the changed report settings;
Set standard settings loads the settings from the report variant;
Change variant opens the window to customize the report variant;
Select variant opens the form to select a report variant;
Save variant opens the form to save the report variant;
Change form opens the form used to customize the report form;
Open new window opens a new report form with current settings.
For details on working with settings, see "Using Quick Settings" section and
"Changing Report Variant" below.
The procedure used to work with report details is described in "Working with
Report Details" on the page99.
NOTE
Forms with hidden system commands are shown in fig. 78 and the other illustrations in the examples below.
8.1. Report Setup

Some report settings may be edited in a dedicated form. When a report is processed,
these settings are used together with the main report settings.
To open a form where you will be able to edit settings, click Settings in the report
form.
Fig. 79. Setup form for 'Sales Trends' report
To save the selected settings, click Finish editing.

To edit the settings displayed in the report form, select All actions Change settings
set. The settings list editing form then opens in a new window.
Chapter 8. Reports
91
Fig. 80. Changing the report settings set
All available report settings are displayed on the left, and the settings edited in the
report form are shown on the right.
To manage a set of user settings, use the following buttons:
Add > adds a setting from the list on the left to the right.
Add all >> adds all settings from the list on the left to the right.
< Delete deletes the setting from the list on the right.
<< Delete all deletes all settings from the list on the right.
To restore a standard user settings list, use the All actions Set standard settings
command.
If the settings do not result in generation of the required report, you can create your
own report variant. You need to have some experience with reports to be able to
create a report variant. For details on working with report variants, see "Editing a
Report Variant" on the page105.
When a report form is closed or current report variant is changed, custom settings are
saved automatically. Custom settings are saved independently for every report variant.
It is possible to select some settings that will be edited most frequently (for example,
filter by goods in the Sales Trends report or filter by company in the accounting
report). These settings will be edited directly in the report form.
If you set filter in the report settings form, a filter element will be added to the
settings list and the settings displayed in the report form.
To use a selected setting in a report, define the value for the setting in the respective
column.
Based on the type of the setting, you should either left-click the column containing
its value or use one of the following actions:
Select a value from the list that pops up when you click Select,
Specify a value in the new window that is displayed when you click Select in
the column of setting value.
92
A sample of a report setting is shown below:
Fig. 81. Selecting a value of quick report setting
A report is not generated when settings are edited.

To generate a report with the defined settings, click Generate.
To disable use of the selected setting in a report, uncheck it in the respective row.
8.2. Report Variants

Multiple variants may be created for a report. A variant defines the view for the
data to be displayed as a result of the report. For example, for a Sales Trends report
you can create a variant where the data on sales of goods by periods are displayed
as a chart and another variant where data on sales by customers are displayed as a
table. At that each report variant has its own set of settings.
The system enables you to create a new report variant directly in the 1C:Enterprise
mode. Before you do this, carefully study "Editing a Report Variant". If this action
is initiated, a new report variant is saved in the infobase.
It is possible to define multiple versions of settings for every report.
For details on working with versions of settings, see "Editing a Report Variant" on
the page105.
8.3. Working with Reports

Let us consider in details users work with a report using Sales Trends report of the
demo configuration as an example. Let us initiate the report using the respective
command on the action panel. The report form will be opened in a new window.
When the report is initiated, Chart by Periods is selected as a variant for the report.
Suppose we need another variant.
93
Chapter 8. Reports
Fig. 82. 'Sales Trends' report form
Now let us click Select variant and select Sales of Goods by Customers report
variant in the new window.
Fig. 83. Selecting a report variant

for the 'Sales Trends' report
Fig. 84. 'Sales Trends' report in the variant

'Sales of goods by customers'
94
Note that the following settings have been selected for this report variant: Period
Current Year and grouping by the fields Good and Customer.
Suppose these are the settings we currently need and generate the report by clicking
Generate (see fig. 83).
Note
A table header is fixed automatically to simplify working in the reports with a

single table or group.
8.3.1. Using Quick Settings

Suppose we want to obtain a report on sales over the previous year. To do so, we
need to change the Period parameter and click Generate:
Fig. 85. 'Sales Trends' report for the previous year
8.3.2. Settings
Suppose it is not sufficient to change the visible parameters (Period and Group).
To view the parameters that can be customized for the report variant, click Setup.
A list of settings will open in a new window.
Fig. 86. Setup form for Sales Trends report
Chapter 8. Reports
95
8.3.2.1. Filter
To apply a filter, define a value for the filter in the settings form. To do so, select
the Value column in the item row and click Select or press F4.
Fig. 87. Filter setup form for Sales Trends report
1. In the window that opens click Add New Item or drag a field from the list of
Available Fields.
2. Select Comparison Type from the list that pops up when you click Select.
3. Define a filter value by selecting it from the list that opens when you click
Select or enter it to the column.
4. If required, define the order for the filter items with Move up and Move down
buttons.
5. Click K.
For details on using filters and the comparison types, see "Filter" section on the
page116.
8.3.2.2. Sorting
To define an order of records in the report results, in the setup form select Value in
the Sorting row and click Select or press F4.
Fig. 88. Sorting setup for 'Sales Trends' report results
96
1. In the window that opens click Add New Item and select the field or drag a field
from the list of Available Fields.
2. Select Sort direction (Ascending/Descending).
3. If required, define the order for the sorting items with Move up and Move down
buttons.
4. Click K.
If multiple sorting fields exist, the data in a report will be sorted initially by the first
field followed by the second field, etc.
For details on working with sorting, see "Sorting" on the page119.
Sample Sorting Setup

For example, let us sort the Report on Payments by supplier and by document dates
for every supplier. The filter settings will look as follows:
Fig. 89. Setup of report sorting
In the editing form click OK. The resulting report will look as shown below:
Fig. 90. Result of report sorting setup
8.3.2.3. Conditional Appearance

To define a conditional appearance for report result records, in the settings form
select Value in the Conditional Appearance row and click selection button or press
F4 (see fig. 91).
1. In the window that opens click Add.
2. Select the required appearance parameters on the Appearance tab: background
color, font color, etc.
3. Specify the condition for formatting to be applied to the fields on the Condition
tab. A condition is specified in the same manner as it is for filter.
Chapter 8. Reports
97
4. On the Formatted fields tab from the list of available fields select those fields for
appearance to be applied to if the condition is satisfied.
5. If required, define the order for the used appearance elements with Move up and
Move down buttons.
The order of appearance elements defines the sequence for appearance to be
applied to report elements. If two different appearances apply to a report area,
the one that is the last in the list of conditional appearance elements is applied.
6. Click K.
Fig. 91. Conditional appearance of a report setup
For details on conditional appearance customization, see "Conditional Appearance"

on the page119.
Sample Conditional Appearance Setup

For example, let us select the documents associated with OOO Zhivotnovodstvo
from the Report on Mutual Settlements.
To do so, in the report settings we will proceed as follows:
1. Add a new item on the Conditional Appearance tab.
2. In the dialog for editing a conditional appearance item on the Appearance tab
we will click Select and in the Font selection dialog check Bold in the Font style
group.
98
3. On the Condition tab we will add a new item as follows: Document.Company

Equals OOO Zhivotnovodstvo.
4. Click K and make sure that <All fields> is displayed in the Formatted fields.
The setting for a conditional appearance of a report will look as shown below:
Fig. 92. Sample conditional appearance setup
In the variant customization dialog click Finish editing. The report will change to
the view shown below:
Fig. 93. Conditional appearance of a report setup
8.3.2.4. Grouping
To define a grouping of report results, in the setup form select Value in the Grouping
row and click selection button or press F4.
Fig. 94. Report grouping setup
Chapter 8. Reports
99
1. Click Add.
2. In the window that opens select Grouping field and define the type for the
grouping:
No hierarchy the group will only include non-hierarchical records (items);
Hierarchy the group will include both hierarchical and non-hierarchical
records (items and folders);
Hierarchy only the group will only display hierarchical records (folders).
3. Click K.
4. If required, define the order for the groupings with Move up and Move down
buttons.
5. Click K in the grouping editing window.
For details on working with grouping, see "Grouped Fields" on the page112.
Sample Grouping Setup

For example, let us group the result of Report on Payments by the name of supplier.
To do so, we will select Supplier field with Hierarchy type as the field to group by.
The result of report output is shown below:
Fig. 95. Report on payments grouped by 'Supplier' field
8.4. Working with Report Details

When you mouse-over a cell of a report result, the cursor will change its shape if
details are possible for the cell (see the figure). If you now double-click this cell,
the details menu will be displayed.
Double-clicking this cell opens the cells value in a new window, while doubleclicking the cell with resources prompts you to select a field for entering the details,
after which the details are created.
100
Right-clicking always displays a details menu.
Fig. 96. Details menu for a report cell
Drill down view detailed information on the content of the field. All the details are
displayed in a new window.
For example, let us find out when kettles Bosch15 were sold. To do so, in the
already generated Sales Trends we will select the cell Bosch15 and open Drill down.
In the field selection window that opens we should select Period.
Fig. 97. Selecting a field for report details
101
Chapter 8. Reports
Click Select. The details will open in a new window.
Fig. 98. Report details
The command Open ""will open the viewing form for the data displayed in the
cell. For example, a window containing a form of the list item.
Fig. 99. Form of a list item
Filter enables filtering of the current report structure item by the value of the
selected field or defining a filter by the value of another field (use Advanced and
specify a filter condition). For example, let us filter out the rows of the report with
Amount (Turnover) over 50,000:
Fig. 100. Filter condition editing dialog
102
The result is displayed in a new window.
Fig. 101. Filter result
Order applies ordering of the current report item content by the value of the
current field. Clicking Advanced enables you to specify an arbitrary field. For
example, the table of the report may be ordered by the Good field.
Fig. 102. Result of report ordering
Group selects a field and defines a type of grouping in the current item of the
report structure. For example, from the Balance of Goods report we need to find
out what shoes are available in which warehouse. To do so, let us select Warehouse
grouping field.
Fig. 103. Selecting a grouping field
Chapter 8. Reports
103
Let us filter by the value Good in Group Shoes. The result of the report is shown
below:
Fig. 104. Result of report grouping
Format makes it possible to specify a condition for an appearance to be applied
and customize appearance for the current report item. For example, we should
format the fields where QuantityBalance<10 items.
Fig. 105. Report appearance example
104
Chapter 9
Editing a Report Variant

It is only recommended to edit report variants for experience users familiar with
report setup in the data composition system. To edit the report type, use the All
actions Change variant command.
This will open a report variant form.
Fig. 106. Report variant setup form
The process of report variant customization is the process of changing report structure and selecting required parameters, creating custom fields, specifying fields to
group by, to filter by and to sort by for every report item.
106
At any moment you can return an edited report customization variant to the initial
view using All Actions Standard settings.
All Actions Save settings is intended to save report settings to a file.
You can load settings from a file using All Actions Load settings. Settings are
loaded in compliance with the access rights of the current user.
The Change Form command of the All Actions menu is designed to edit the form of
report variant customization itself. For details on form customization, see "Form
Setup" on the page 147.
9.1. General Report Customization

To apply settings to the entire report, select the node Report in the report structure
as shown on fig. 106. The assortment of settings (and their respective tabs) depends
on available fields and selected customization item.
Fig. 107. Report variant customization
9.2. Changing Report Structure

In the data composition system report items may include groups, table, chart, and a
nested report.
107
Chapter 9. Editing a Report Variant
Grouping displays data as a list. To add a grouping to a report, select Add New
Grouping or press Ins. In the window that opens select a field to group by and the
type of grouping as shown below:
Fig. 108. Grouping customiztion form
If no field to group by is selected, the report will have detailed records added.
These are the records obtained from the database ordered same as they are in the
database.
In the simplest case when you add a grouping by the field Good the report will look
as shown below.
Fig. 109. Grouping in a report

Tip
You can also select structure elements that should be joined into groups and use
All Actions Group.
The Ungroup command removes a grouping but keeps its content.

Table displays data as a table. To add a table to the structure, select Add New
table. Groupings are used for rows and columns of such a table.
For example, a report structure may have a table created where the list of goods
will serve as its rows while the columns will display data on the balance of goods in
the warehouse (see the picture below).
108
Fig. 110. Table in a report structure
Chart displays the data as a chart. To add a chart into the structure, select Add
New chart. You can use points and series depending on the type of chart. One or
several resources may be specified as values (of the selected fields) according to
the application settings.
Fig. 111. Chart in a report structure
Nested report if a nested report was created for the report at the configuration
stage, it can also be used as an element in the report structure.
Tip
The commands that are most frequently used for operations on the report structure
can also be opened from the context menu of the Structures field.
To remove an item from a structure, select it in the structure field and click Delete
or press Del.
109
9.2.1. Customization of Report Structure Item

To customize a specific item of the report structure, select this item in the structure
and on the setup tab check Current item has individual settings <setting name> (for
detailed item customization).
Note that customization scope depends on the type of the item:

The following can be customized for a Grouping item: Grouped Fields, Selected
fields, Filter, Sorting, Conditional Appearance, Additional settings;
The following can be customized for a Table and a Chart: Selected fields,
Conditional Appearance, Additional settings.
Note
If a nested report is available in the report settings, note that settings for the reports
are separated.
9.2.2. Setting Elements
9.2.2.1. Available fields

The list of available fields (see fig. 112) allows to easily select available fields and
move it to the lists of fields to group by, to select, to filter by, to sort by using
standard drag and drop operations. Using All Actions menu for the available fields,
you can select the current field or all the available fields to locate them to the corresponding collection (Select All will select all the fields that are on the same level
with the current row in the tree of available fields; folders are not selected). The list
of available fields includes: fields, resource fields and folders of fields.
Fig. 112. The list of available report fields
The following nested fields may be used for each number resource in the report:
% in a row or series: contains the ratio of the resource value in the current cell to
the row total resource value in the table output. In the non-table output it shows
100 %.
% in a column or point: contains the ratio of the resource value in the current cell
to the row total resource value in the table output. In the non-table output the
field value is equal to the field "Overall %".
110
% in a group by row or series: contains the ratio of the resource value in the
current cell to the current group total resource value in the table output. In the
non-table output it shows 100 %.
% in a group by column or point: contains the ratio of the resource value in the
current cell to the total resource value for the current group by column, which is
equal to the field "% in a group" in the table output. In the non-table output the
field value is equal to the field "% in a group".
% in a hierarchy group by row or series: contains the ratio between the resource
value in the current cell to the total resource value at the current hierarchy level
in the current group by row in the table output. In the non-table output it shows
100 %.
% in a hierarchy group by column or point: contains the ratio between the
resource value in the current cell to the total resource value at the current hierarchy level in the current group by column, which is equal to the field "% in a
hierarchy group" in the table output. In the non-table output the field value is
equal to the field "% in a hierarchy group".
When these fields are displayed in a chart, the final field headers contain no references to rows or columns. For example, the field % in a string or series in the output
chart will have a % in a series title.
When these fields are displayed in a non-chart object, the final field headers will
not contain any references to series or points. For example, the field % in a string or
series in the output table will have a % in a series title.
9.2.2.2. Parameters
If a report has some customizable parameters, they will be displayed in the list of
available fields in the Parameters folder and will be available to include them into
a report and to exclude them as well as to select a value (if multiple values were
assigned to a parameter) on the Parameters tab. For example if a period is used for
a report to be generated, the value for the report should be selected by the user.
Fig. 113. Report parameters in the variant setup form
Parameters can be used as fields in various report settings. When a the report is run,
parameter values are substituted to the settings for the fields that use them.
111
For example, if a report includes Company as a parameter, the field Parameters.

Company will be available in the filter. When this field is selected as a value for a
filter, Company will be used as a value for the parameter.
For a Date parameter you can both use a specific date and one of the standard dates
as its value: Beginning of this day, Beginning of next day, etc.
9.2.2.3. Custom Fields

The Custom fields tab allows you to create fields to be used in a report. To insert a
custom field into a report, add it to the list of selected fields. At that ability to use a
custom field in a report item is defined automatically.
There are two types of custom fields: selection field or expression field.
Fig. 114. Custom fields in report variant settings
A selection field may have multiple values. The first value to satisfy the filter
condition will be selected to record to a report. Specify a title and expression for the
filter, value and short filter presentation if required.
Fig. 115. Report setup. Custom selection field
Filter conditions are defined in a new window and are added using the Add button.
Next select a field from the list of available fields, Comparison type and define a
Value for comparison.
To define an order of the filter items, use the arrows on the command bar or drag an
item to the required row with your mouse.
112
A custom expression field will be displayed in a report as a resulting value of

expressions. Expressions are composed using Available fields of a report and the
expressions of the data composition system language. Custom fields may be used
in any location within a report. Custom resource fields cannot be used as a field to
group by.
In the Edit custom field dialog select a title and expressions for detailed and resulting
records.
Fig. 116. Custom expression field
The names of the fields containing spaces and/or special characters, should be
enclosed in square brackets [].
Expression for total records should be written using statistical functions, e.g.:
Amount (Field) * 2.
For details on data composition language, see Appendix 1. Data Composition
System Expressions Language (available in electronic version of the documentation).
9.2.2.4. Grouped Fields

On the Grouped Fields tab, you can select fields to group by and the type of
grouping.
Fig. 117. Grouped fields in the report item
113
A grouping may have one of the following types:

No hierarchy the group will only include non-hierarchical records (items).
Hierarchy the group will include both hierarchical and non-hierarchical records
(items and folders).
Hierarchy only the group will only display hierarchical records (folders).
The menu allows to add a new field or a new auto field.
Auto field of grouping

A grouped auto field is a set of fields that are generated automatically following
the rule below. The fields used in the report are selected provided that they are:
Available to use in the fields to group by,
Are not resources,
Are not attributes of other selected fields,
Are not attributes of existing fields to group by.
To view the set of fields that the auto field of grouping will be transformed into
when the report is run, select All Actions Expand.
If a field is already included in the data of the grouping field, it will not be added
repeatedly.
If available types of the grouping field include date, it is possible to customize
period addition (to include the dates that do not fall into the result into the report).
For example, if you want the data for all the weeks to be included into a report,
select Week as an addition type and choose the start and end dates of the period as
shown below.
Fig. 118. Customization of group by addition
Let us illustrate this with an example. Suppose the Mutual Settlements report includes
the data on mutual settlements with stores named "Butcher Shop" and "Groceries"
for the period from the 1st of January, 2009 to the 31st of December, 2009.
Fig. 119. Report without addition
114
At that you now need to display data by the quarters. To do so, we will need to
specify an Addition for the Period, month on the Grouping tab.
Fig. 120. Setup of report addition
This will result in the Mutual Settlements report changing as follows:
Fig. 121. Report with an Addition
9.2.2.5. Fields
The Fields tab is intended to select the fields to be displayed in the report. If no
fields are selected, an empty item is included into the report. Using menu or context
menu, you can add a new field, a field group or an auto field. A field group can be
named and you can also manage their location in the current report item.
115
Fig. 122. Report setup. Fields
9.2.2.6. Selection Autofield

You can use automatic field sets as fields during system customization. When
creating report structure elements, the system automatically adds an <Auto> field
as a selection field. Selection autofield is a set of fields to be converted to when
creating a report. To view a set of fields, use the All actions Expand command. If
you need to add an autofield, use the New autofield button.
When a selection autofield is expanded, it is transformed into a set of selected
fields.
The assortment of the set of fields depends on the structure item the expanded auto
field belongs to and the part of structure this item is located in. For every item, the
system passes through all the parent items of the report structure and selects the
resources and fields from the selected fields of these items following these rules:
For a grouping and a table grouping an auto field is replaced with all the used
fields of the grouping that are available for use in the selected fields; the fields
that are attributes of its grouping fields and resources of parent items.
Warning!
In the process the system only takes into account the groupings of the types No
or Hierarchy.
hierarchy
For a chart grouping the resources are not selected. Instead, all the parent items
of the settings structure are passed and the grouping fields are selected among
the selected fields of these items if Only hierarchy grouping has been defined for
this grouping.
For groupings of the type Detailed records (grouping, table grouping,
chart grouping) all the used fields are selected from the main selected fields
of settings the grouping belongs to except for the fields that participated in the
above grouping and attributes of these fields. It the grouping is of the Hierarchy
only type, its fields and attributes will be used by the system when a set of selection fields is generated. Resources are not selected for a chart grouping either.
116
In a chart, a selection autofield is replaced with all the resources specified for
the chart. Depending on the application settings, the selection autofield may be
replaced with the resource that occurred first during the abovementioned iteration.
For a table a selection auto field is converted to a set of resources used by the
parent items.
NOTE
If a field is already included in the data of the selected field, it will not be added
repeatedly.
At that the fields are added into a set as follows: first the fields of the groupings
own fields (for groupings), next fields of the global settings (for Detailed records
groupings) while the last to be added are the resources and fields of the parent
items.
The selected fields can be joined into groups that are added using Group command
(for the command to be available, all the highlighted rows of the table should share
the parent). Ungroup command is used to delete the fields while nested fields are
preserved. For a group you can define a location within the current item of the
report structure. To do so, select the required location type from the list in the
Location column.
9.2.2.7. Filter
On the Filter tab, you can select the fields to filter records of the report result. Using
the menu, the context menu or by double-clicking any of the selected fields among
the available fields you can add an item or a folder of items. Here you can select a
filter from those predefined by the developer or add another filter.
Fig. 123. Report item setup. Filter presentation
When you use All Actions Detailed, this tab will display the filter conditions along
with their presentations.
117
Fig. 124. Report item setup. Filter
In this tab's columns, you can specify values for the records of the report result to
be filtered by.
Presentation. Using Define presentation command of the context menu, you can
define a presentation for the created item or folder of a filter. This presentation
will display the information on the filter item in a list if the Details button on the
command bar is not clicked. If no presentation was defined for a filter, its detailed
presentation will be the same as non-detailed presentation on the Filter tab.
Application. For a grouping, grouping in a table and grouping in a chart, there is
another available property for the filter items Application.
Fig. 125. Application setup for a filter item
If Application has the value Hierarchy, the filter condition is checked after hierarchy
is composed. Hierarchy only as a value demonstrates that the filter condition is only
checked for the hierarchical records. Filtered records still influence the resulting
values of the resources of the superior hierarchical records. The nested groups of
records that are filtered by these properties, will also be included into the report.
Comparison types
This section describes the types of comparison that are available for filters.
Equal to the result will include the records with the value of the field defined as
the left value equal to the right value.
Not Equal the result will include the records with the value of the field defined as
the left value not equal to the right value.
Less Than the result will include the records with the value of the field defined as
the left value less than the right value.
Less than or Equal the result will include the records with the value of the field
defined as the left value less or equal to the right value.
118
Greater Than the result will include the records with the value of the field defined
as the left value higher than the right value.

Greater than or Equal the result will include the records with the value of the field
defined as the left value higher or equal to the right value.
In a list the result will include the records containing the fields having the value
available in a list. The list of values is defined in a new window that is opened
when you select the Left Value column.
In a group from the list the result will include the records with their values
belonging to a folder available in the list. The list of groups is defined in a new
window that is opened upon selection.
In a group the resulting document will include the records with their left value
field being in the specified folder of the list items.
In a group from the list all entries whose values refer to the groups in the list
or which are specified in the list will be output. A list of groups and elements is
created in a separate window that opens during selection.
Not in list the result will include the records that do not contain the fields having
the value available in a list. The list of values is defined in a new window that is
opened when you select the Left Value column.
Not a group from the list the resulting document will include the records with their
left value field being in the specified folder of the list items.
Contains the result will include the records that contain the substring that is used
as the value.
Does not contai the result will include the records that do not contain the substring
that is used as the value.
Filled the result will include the records that have the specified field populated.
Not filled the result will include the records that have the specified field unpopulated.
Joining Filter Conditions

The filter conditions may be combined into logical groups using AND, NOT or into
groups using OR. To combine conditions, select them and click Group conditions:
If the conditions are joined with AND, the report will include the data that satisfy
all the conditions in the group.
If the conditions are combined with NOT, the resulting document will not
include the records that meet all the conditions of the group.
If the filters are joined with OR, the data will be recorded if at least one of
the conditions is satisfied. Using context menu you can define presentations for
groups. If a group has a presentation, the nested folders will not be displayed in
the short mode.
119
9.2.2.8. Sorting
On the Sorting tab, you can select the fields to sort report results by. You can add
an order element or an auto order element. When a report is executed, the system
transforms (expands) an order auto item into the fields it will sort by.
Fig. 126. Fields to sort by for a report item
For an order auto item the All Actions menu includes Expand command that is
intended to view the set of fields that this field will be transformed into when the
report is executed. When an auto item (of order) is expanded, resource fields will be
unconditionally added from the global order while those fields that are not resource
fields will be added to the order that are the attributes of the grouping field and
the grouping field will be added itself (all the fields will be added for the detailed
records). The grouping fields that were not specified in the global order, will be
located in the end of the order.
9.2.2.9. Conditional Appearance

The Conditional Appearance tab is intended to define formatting for various report
items depending on the values of the data recorded into the report. For example,
it is possible to apply a specific color to negative values, etc. Multiple structure
items can be formatted in this manner. At that areas to be formatted are defined for
every item.
Conditional appearance can include multiple items. Every item describes an area to
be formatted.
An area is a list of fields that are selected from the list of available fields. If no area
is specified, conditional appearance will be applied to the entire report item.
For every area you can specify conditions that will cause the selected formatting to
be applied to the area.
The conditions to select fields are specified in a new window that is similar to the
filter window of the custom selection field. For details on filters, see page 116.
120
If two different appearances apply to an area, the one that is the last in the list of
conditional appearance elements is applied.
Fig. 127. Conditional appearance items in the detailed mode
The Format column defines a designation for the conditional appearance of an area
that will be used to display this appearance in the list of conditional appearances
provided that the button near the Details command of the All Actions menu is not
clicked.
The conditional appearance parameters are specified in a new window. You can
select the color of the background, text, cell borders, the text font in the cell, etc.
Background color specifies the color of the background.
Text color defines the text color for text data.
Color in chart defines the color of data series in a chart.
Border color the color to be applied to the border of a data item.
Border style the color to be applied to the border of items. It is possible to
define the type for every border independently.
Font the font for the text data to be displayed.
Indent defines an indent for a specific number of characters.
Autoindent if this option is set to more than 0, indentation will be defined as a
product of the grouping level and property value when groupings are displayed.
Horizontal Align this property selects horizontal alignment of text.
Vertical Align this property selects vertical alignment of text.
Placement specifies how text should be displayed if it does not fit into a cell.
Text orientation a number that defines text tilt angle in cells of groupings and
tables.
Format defines data display format.
Mark negatives if this property is set to Yes, any negative values will be highlighted in color in the report output.
Mark incomplete if this property is set to Yes, any incomplete values will
display differently in the report output.
121
Minimum width a number that defines the minimum number of characters for
the width of data display.
Maximum width a number that defines the maximum number of characters for
the width of data display.
Minimum height a number that defines the minimum number of characters for
the height of data display.
Maximum height a number that defines the maximum number of characters for
the height of data display.
Text arbitrary text describing the data.
9.2.2.10. Additional Settings

The Additional Settings tab defines display parameters for a selected structure item.
For example, for a grouping the tabs content will be as follows:
Fig. 128. Additional settings of a report item

NOTE 1
When generating a report, the system displays an error message if a nested report
has a top-level field for which it is impossible to define a value.
NOTE 2
When you place a Pie type chart in report structure, note that if the points are set
and the series are not, the system automatically uses points as series. For Line chart
type, if the series are set and the points are not, series are used as points.
9.3. Selecting Settings Items

To specify that a setup item should be available in the report setup form, use
Custom Settings Item Properties command in the item setup.
122
In the custom item setup form you can demonstrate that this is a custom element
and also specify a presentation to be used for the item and editing mode (normal,
quick access, unavailable), see fig. 129.
Fig. 129. Adding a custom settings item
In the settings structure list, the Custom Settings Item Properties command allows
to customize custom settings for the current structure item.
Every structure item has its own assortment of customizable items.
Object
Report
Grouping/table grouping/chart grouping
Chart
Table
Nested schema
Customizable Items
Selected fields, order, filter, conditional appearance,
assortment of groupings
Grouping, selected fields,
filter, order, conditional appearance, assortment of
nested groupings
Chart, selected fields, conditional appearance,
assortment of series groupings, assortment of points
groupings
Table, selected fields, conditional appearance, assortment of rows groupings, assortment of columns
groupings
Nested report, selected fields, filter, order, conditional
appearance, assortment of groupings
Depending on where you use Custom Settings Item Properties, the command allows
you to change various settings:
Filter list the settings for the current item/folders of the filter;
List of output parameters and data parameters settings for the current parameter;
Conditional appearance list settings for the current item of conditional appearance.
123
Besides, the Preview Custom Settings command available on the report structure
command bar (see the figure below), makes it possible to open a modal form that
will display the settings along with their default values.
Fig. 130. Custom settings preview
124
Chapter 10
Service Features
1C:Enterprise provides various service features for navigation within the application: links (references), history, favorites.
It is also possible to use built-in calculator, calendar, file comparison feature, etc.
This chapter covers the above mentioned features.
10.1. Links
It is possible to obtain a text link to any software interface section, report, or data
processor as well as to infobase objects (documents, items of lists, etc.).
The obtained link can be stored and used later for navigation. As the links are text
fragments, it is possible to send them to other users by e-mail or using other tools.
To obtain a link, use Tools Get reference item of the main menu or click Get
reference of the system commands area.
For example, let us obtain a link to the list Sales of the Sales section:
Fig. 131. Obtaining a reference to the sales list
If you want the resulting link to be used in the web browser address bar, click the
External button.
To copy a link to the clipboard, click Copy to clipboard.
To add a link to a favorites list, press Add to favorites.
126
To navigate a link, use the Tools Go to link command, specify the link text saved
earlier in the dialog opened and press the Go to button or Enter. To distinguish
1C:Enterprise links from other types of links (http or file), an e1c schema ID is
used. If an external 1C:Enterprise link whose beginning does not correspond to that
of an infobase navigation link is transferred to the link navigation dialog, an attempt
to navigate using its inner part (which is specified after the e1c ID) will be made
when you are navigating the link. If the navigation attempt fails, the external link
transferred will be navigated instead.
10.2. Favorites
In 1C:Enterprise, Favorites is a list of links selected by the user for quick access to
specific configuration sections, infobase object forms as well as forms of reports
and data processors.
To add a link to an object to your list of favorites:
From the system commands area select Favorites Add to Favorites;
Use Tools Add to Favorites item of the main menu;
When you obtain a link, click the Add to Favorites button. For details on using
links, see "Links" above.
When a link is added to favorites, an appropriate notification will be displayed.
To open your list of favorites, click Favorites in the system commands area.
Fig. 132. Favorites
To navigate to a link from the list of favorites, click the Favorites button and select
the required link from the list by left-clicking it.
127
Chapter 10. Service Features
10.2.1. Favorites Setup

To manage the assortment and order of the favorites, use the form that is opened
when you select Favorites Configure favorites in the system commands area.
Fig. 133. Favorite links setup dialog
To navigate to a link, highlight it with your mouse or highlight a row and click the
Go button.
To arrange the favorites in the list, use the Move current item up and Move current
item down buttons.
To remove the current favorite item, click the Delete Current Item button.
10.3. History
1C:Enterprise automatically saves the history of a user's operations for subsequent
quick access to recently created or edited infobase objects (documents, items of
lists, etc.).
When objects are added or edited interactively, these events are displayed as notifications and recorded to history (for details on alerts, see "Notifications" in this
chapter).
The user history is stored in the infobase. The history contains only one record
for each infobase object (a record about the subsequent modification replaces the
record about the previous modification of this object). A maximum of 200 records
can be stored per a specific user. If the number of stored items reaches 200, the
oldest history records will be replaced with the new ones.
Viewing history. Click the History button in the bottom left corner of the main
application window. A list of all events will open (seefig. 134). Left-clicking any
event will open the form of the object the event is related to.
Search for a history element. To search for an event in the list, right-click
anywhere in the list and select Find in the context menu. Search for an event is
similar to search in a list. The list of events also supports quick search. Search in
lists is described on the page 96.
Updating history list. An opened list of events is only read by the software at the
moment of opening the window and is not updated in the future. To refresh the
history window, close this window and reopen it.
128
Fig. 134. History
10.4. All Functions

It possible to open all the available forms. This is done using the list displayed
when you use All functions command of the main menu. This command is available
if the corresponding system parameters option is set and the user is authorized to
call this mode (for details, see "System Options" on the page153).
Fig. 135. The list of all software functions
If a user does not have a right to view a specific object, such an object will not be
included in the list.
The Standard folder includes standard features (list of active users, event log, etc.).
For details on standard features, see the document "1C:Enterprise 8.2. Administrator Guide".
To switch to an object, double-click this object in the tree of objects or highlight it
in the tree and click the Open button.
129
10.5. Notifications
Notifications are intended to alert the user about specific actions executed by the
application. Notifications can be created by the software or by an application solution developer.
A notification is displayed in a window that is attached to the system tray of the
operating system. If a notification is associated with some link, its description will
also serve as a hyperlink. Clicking the hyperlink opens the object it is linked to.
The description will also serve as a hyperlink if this notification is generated automatically (when an object is recorded/edited interactively).
Fig. 136. Notification of 'Cash Receipt' document modification

Text reason for the notification. If multiple objects are modified, the number
of modified objects is specified in brackets.
Details further description.
A notification window is hidden after a certain delay. But if you hover your mouse
over the window, it will stay displayed until you close the window or reposition
your cursor away.
If multiple different notifications are generated in the process of application operation, the notification text in brackets will include the number of modified objects
and the name of the list will be used for details.
When the list of notifications is displayed in the information panel, they are aligned
right. The latest notification will be displayed near the right border of the panel.
If more than five notifications exist, only the last five notifications are displayed.
NOTE
The list of notifications is cleared when you close the main application window.
10.6. Messages
In the process of operation some situations may occur when a requested action
cannot be executed. For example, a required field is found to be empty during
posting of a document. In these situations it may be possible to notify the user
in a specific message window. The message window will include a list of reasons
for the occurred error.
130
Double-clicking in a row of the message list will open a special window with the
cursor on the field which was not filled correctly. If the message is not related to
any specific field, a standard warning will be displayed. If a message cannot be
displayed in the required form table cell, the message will be positioned within the
table itself.
Fig. 137. Error messages
If a message is related to an attribute of another infobase object, the form of this

object will open and a message with the cursor at the specific field will be displayed
in this window.
If the message window includes multiple messages, the Back/Forward buttons will
be included in the bottom of the window specifying the field with an error. These
buttons allow you to navigate between the fields these messages are associated
with.
When you save an item or post a document, the message window is cleared and
populated with new messages generated during the selected action.
If data has been searched in the form table, then the table data search will be
cancelled and the message displayed in the required cell when a user selects the
message.
NOTE
To open and close the message window when you work with a form, press
Ctrl+Shift+Z.
10.7. Status of a Lengthy Process

In the process of operation situations may occur when a specific process takes some
time. It may happen, for example, when you attempt to post numerous documents
or execute resourceful calculations. In this situation a message is displayed demonstrating the status of such a lengthy process, seefig. 138.
131
Fig. 138. Status of a process progress
The message automatically extinguishes after some time. The message reappears
when you hover your mouse over it. Depending on the configuration, it may be
possible to abort the process by pressing Ctrl+Break.
10.8. Calculator
To execute simple current calculations, 1C:Enterprise has a built-in calculator.
It can be opened in any program mode (except when the program is awaiting a
response to a request) by selecting Tools Calculator.
The calculator can be dragged to any part of the screen and its window can be
resized. All the controls located in the calculator form change their size in proportion to the window size.
Fig. 139. Calculator
The calculator can be used to perform any arithmetic operations, calculate percentages and reciprocal values, save numbers, and add or subtract saved values.
When inputting values, you can edit the inputted value and delete any digits that
were input by mistake.
You can use both your mouse and your keyboard to work with the calculator.
In terms of functions, this numeric calculator resembles a real calculator.
The calculator can save the last 15 calculations. To view the result of any calculation, click the Select from list button located to the right of the text box and select
the required calculation.
The calculator has 10 memory registers to save values and use them in calculations.
To operate the first register, use the buttons MR, M+, M and MC.
Click the MS button to save calculation results in the first register.
132
The field M = displays the value of the clipboard if the clipboard contains a
number.
Click the MR button to read a saved value from the first register to the text box.
Click the M+ button for the value saved in the first register to be added to calculation
results; click the M- button for the value saved in the first register to be subtracted
from calculation results. Use the MC button to clear the first register content.
To save a number to another register, get the number to the display (by typing it or
as a result of calculation). Click Select near the MS button.
A list of registers is displayed:
Fig. 140. The list of available registers
To save a number to a register, click the button for this register.

To obtain a number from a register, click the button, located next to the MR, M+,
and M- buttons, depending on the type of the action, and select the register. You
should perform a similar procedure to clear the register (MC button).
Fig. 141. Buttons for operations with registers
The calculator works in various modes. You can select a mode by clicking the
Menu button of the calculator (see fig. 138) and selecting the required item from the
context menu. Formula calculator and Microcalculator items available in the menu
are intended to toggle the respective calculator modes.
The Settings item of the context menu is intended to define precision of the
calculator. A setup dialog is displayed where the desired number of digits after the
decimal point should be specified for presentation of results.
133
In the Microcalculator mode, all the actions are performed using the keyboard. The
calculator has a simplified form:
Fig. 142. Calculator in the microcalculator mode
Use the keyboard keys to input numbers. Use the C key to clear the text box.
Formula calculator. In this mode all the actions are entered into the calculator
string sequentially. Brackets can be used to organize a specific sequence of actions
and enter complex formulas.
Fig. 143. Formula calculator
The calculator can be opened to select an attribute value of the Number type in the
text box by clicking the selection button or pressing F4. With the calculator you can
enter more digits after the decimal point than defined for the attribute. Clicking OK
rounding off is applied in compliance with established rules. To adjust precision of
the calculator, click the Menu button and select Settings. A setup dialog is displayed
where the desired number of digits after the decimal point should be specified for
presentation of results.
10.8.1. Working with Clipboard

For operations with the clipboard, 1C:Enterprise provides an enhanced tool for
operations with numbers. In addition to simply copying a number to the clipboard, a
number can also be added to the value in the clipboard or subtracted from this value.
Normally you can use the M, M+ and M- buttons of the standard command bar to do
this.
When you click M (or press Shift+Num* keyboard shortcut), the highlighted value
is copied to the clipboard.
The M+ button (Shift + Num+ keyboard shortcut) adds the currently highlighted
value to the value stored in the clipboard.
The M- button (Shift+Num- keyboard shortcut) subtracts the current value from the
value stored in the clipboard.
These actions are available in all the forms for numeric values and also for operations with tables. When working with a spreadsheet document, actions can also be
performed with multiple cells simultaneously: for example, you can highlight multiple
cells and then copy it or add their sum to the clipboard using the specified actions.
134
The results in the clipboard can be used in any forms, for example, the values can
be inserted using Shift+Ins or the corresponding menu items.
A numeric value of the current value stored in the clipboard can be viewed in the
formula calculator mode in the M= field.
If you want to copy a number from the 1C:Enterprise environment to the Windows
calculator or to a Microsoft Office Excel cell, use M, M+, M- commands to save the
number instead of the commands that copy the value to the clipboard.
Note that for the formula calculator and the immediate window a number is saved
in compliance with regional infobase settings but without group separators, while
decimal separators are replaced by decimal points.
For other clipboard targets, a number is saved with regional operating system
settings and without group separators.
10.9. Calendar
1C:Enterprise features a built-in calendar. You can open it in any mode of the
application by selecting the Tools Calendar menu item. The calendar is also used
to enter dates.
Fig. 144. Calendar window
The window displays the current month's calendar. The month name and the year
appear in the window title bar. Below is the weekdays bar. The current date is highlighted with a red border. You can select a different date with your mouse, a grey
border will appear around the selected date, and this date will be displayed in the
bottom line of the window.
To navigate between months and to change the year, use the buttons available
around the window title.
Fig. 145. Navigation buttons
To quickly select the current date, month beginning or end date, or year beginning
or end date, we recommend using the context menu that is opened with the button,
located in the bottom line to the right of the selected date name.
135
Fig. 146. Calendar. Selection context menu
If you click the row containing the name of the month and the year, a list of months
available for selection will be displayed. Move the mouse pointer up or down to
scroll through the list to the desired value. Select the required row of the list to
change the month.
Fig. 147. Calendar. The list of months
You can drag the calendar to any place on the screen and resize its window.
At that when the window size is increased, calendars for multiple months are
displayed.
Fig. 148. Calendar for three months
Calendars are added when the size of the window is increased in any direction.
When the size is decreased, additional calendars are hidden.
The calendar can also be located as a form control linked to a specific attribute
containing a date. In addition, for the dates located in a form as an text box, the
value can be selected using the calendar that is opened by clicking the selection
button or pressing F4.
The methods for working with these calendars are similar to those described above.
136
10.10. Files Comparison

In the file comparison mode, you can compare any two files. Use the File Compare
Files option of the main menu to compare files. A dialog will open where you will
be able to select the files to compare.
Fig. 149. Dialog to select files to compare
In the Compare and With fields, specify the names of the files to be compared. You
can enter file names manually, select them from the dropdown list or use the Browse
button to locate the files in the standard file opening dialog. You can specify any
type of the source file in the File Type field of the dialog.
Use the As field to specify how the files are to be compared. Text and spreadsheet
documents can be compared. Binary comparison is possible. In this case, the
comparison result will tell you whether the files are different or not.
If files of different types are specified in the fields Compare and C, upon comparison the selected files will be cast to the type specified in the As field. And then the
actual comparison will be performed, and comparison results will be displayed.
If Match Line Splitters is checked, the symbols used as line splitters will be taken
into account during comparison.
Click OK to initiate the comparison process.
If you select Text Document as a comparison type, the selected files will be interpreted as text documents for comparison, although the Compare and To fields can
contain non-text files (according to file extensions). If one or both specified files
cannot be interpreted as text files, a binary comparison will be performed.
10.10.1. Text Files Comparison

Check the Ignore Empty Space option to omit space in the comparison for text
files.
Use the Case Sensitive option for case sensitive comparison. If this option is
checked, uppercase and lowercase letters are considered to be different symbols.
The Match Line Splitters check box means that line splitters will be taken into
account for files comparison.
137
Before comparing, the program sequentially attempts to read files in UTF-8,

UTF-16 and ANSI encoding. If the files can be read and do not contain 0 when read
in ANSI encoding, the application compares them as text documents. If the read
attempts fail (or 0 is contained for ANSI), the application compares them as binary
data.
Upon completion of a text files comparison, a window with a list of differences will
open. The compared texts will be located in two columns of this window. Deleted,
modified and added (new) strings will be highlighted by different colors in the
texts. The window contains a toolbar with the standard 1C:Enterprise text editor
search and tab buttons and two buttons specific to the window.
Fig. 150. Text files comparison dialog
These buttons are large arrows pointing up and down. The arrows are intended to
navigate to the beginning of the previous or next modified text. They can be used to
quickly move to the next or previous differing text.
Fig. 151. Files comparison toolbar
Clicking LF results in line splitters displayed as letters LF and CR in the texts.

Text color is used to highlight differences in the compared texts. The text color
can be customized (the color setup window is opened when you click the Settings
button). By default, deleted text is highlighted in blue, green is used for added text,
and modified text is marked in red.
The left portion of the window displays the text of the file specified in the Compare
field while the right portion is for the file from the To field. Clicking Change
Comparison Order button switches the locations of the compared files. When you
switch files, color markings will also change. If the left part originally contained
deleted text, after switching, this text will be shown in the right file as added text.
138
10.10.2. Spreadsheet Documents Comparison

If you compare spreadsheet documents, a window will be displayed to highlight the
differences.
Fig. 152. Spreadsheet documents comparison window
This window consists of two sections (left and right). The source documents are
placed in both sections of this window. Use command bar buttons to manage
display and customize colors.
The Next Difference and Previous Difference buttons take you to the next or
previous difference.
The differences are highlighted using background and text colors. The meanings of
the colors are listed in the legend.
Use the Comparison View Settings button to open the differences display settings
dialog.
Fig. 153. Differences display options customization
139
You can save values of the settings as schemas. To do so, click Save As and enter
the name for the settings in the opened dialog. Then click OK.
If you have multiple settings schemas, you can select the required one in the
Schema field of the settings dialog.
To restore the standard color settings, click Default.
Differences in cells, rows, properties of rows and columns are shown as background
color and text color.
Differences in cell combinations are shown with a surrounding frame of the same
color as the text.
Differences in groupings and named areas are shown with text color.
Differences in figures are shown by a surrounding frame of text color, except for
rectangles, lines and ovals, which are drawn in text color.
Modified, deleted and added rows are displayed in different colors in the window
(in both files).
For selected cells you can get a detailed report of invisible differences (text, font,
format, merger, names, etc.). To do so, click the Details button.
10.11. Error Messages

If an error occurs during application operation, an error message is displayed (it
can contain various numbers of buttons where the buttons may also have various
purposes). A sample error message is shown below:
Fig. 154. Division by zero error
An error message may also contain the hyperlink Show technical support information
and appear as follows:
Fig. 155. An error message
The program will be restarted if you press the Restart button.

A separate error log window opens when you click a hyperlink. The log displays
information about both the session (the platform version, configuration name,
working mode, type of client and localization information) as well as the last
140
50 errors during the same session, along with nested errors (the time of the error
and other error details are displayed).
Fig. 156. Technical support information.
Should you experience 1C:Enterprise system failure, the system will display a
dialog with information on the dump recording process. This dialog closes automatically after recording is completed.
Chapter 11
Software Configuration
This chapter covers 1C:Enterprise configuration in details. It is possible to configure
the application interface both globally and for every form independently (provided
that it is supported by the configuration), to define system options, manage display
of text and spreadsheet documents and windows location.
11.1. Interface
1C:Enterprise supports customization of the application interface, including:
Desktop
Sections panel
Navigation panel (both for the main and the auxiliary windows)
Action panel
Auxiliary window toolbar
You can select commands from the lists of available commands and manage their
locations.
Various setup dialogs are opened from the 1C:Enterprise main menu (Tools
Interface Settings item of the main menu).
It is also possible to open the setup window for every panel from this panel's context
menu.
11.1.1. Desktop
It is possible to define the assortment of forms to be displayed on the desktop.
At that you can only manage the forms that are located on the desktop.
To open the desktop setup dialog, select Desktop Customization from the context
menu of the sections panel on the desktop. You can also open the dialog using the
main menu: Tools Interface setup Desktop.
142
Customization is carried out in a dialog consisting of three lists: Available forms and
groups of columns named Left column, Right column. The list of Available forms
displays the forms that are used neither in the left, nor in the right column.
Fig. 157. Desktop setup dialog
You can drag forms from one list to another using the Add >, Add all >> buttons and
move them between columns using the > and < buttons. To remove a form from
a column (and move it back to the list of available forms), highlight it in the list
and click Remove < or double-click the name of the form in the list. You can also
rearrange forms in the columns using Up Down buttons. The forms are displayed
on the desktop in the same order that is specified in the settings.
During the customization process, you can cancel the changes made in this session
or earlier and recover the configuration settings. To do so, select the Set default
settings command from the All Actions menu. This command does not change the
command interface immediately. After executing this command you can continue
customization. Clicking OK applies the settings.
11.1.2. Sections Panel

In the process of Sections Panel customization a user defines a list of commands
to navigate to sections.
The sections panel setup dialog is opened using Sections panel settings command
of the panel context menu or using the Tools menu (see fig. 158).
To add a section to the panel, highlight it in the list of available sections and click
Add >. In the setup dialog you can move list items with your mouse and select
multiple rows simultaneously.
To add all the available sections to the panel, click Add all >>. You can also move
sections between lists by double-clicking a section in the list.
To remove commands from the panel, use Remove and Remove all buttons.
Chapter 11. Software Configuration
143
Fig. 158. Sections panel setup form
The sequence of sections on the panel is managed using the buttons on the command
bar of the list of selected items (see fig. 158).
You can configure presentation for every section. To do so, highlight an item and
select the required presentation mode in the list Show: Picture, Text, Picture and
Text.
To apply the selected settings and close the form, click OK. This saves the settings
in the infobase.
NOTE
If all the sections are removed from the sections panel, it is automatically hidden
and the main application window switches to the Desktop.
or earlier and recover the configuration settings. To do so, select All Actions Set
default settings. This command does not change the command interface immediately. After executing this command you can continue customization.
11.1.3. Navigation Panel

The arrangement of commands on the navigation panel is customized in the
Navigation panel setup.
Commands to switch to forms of lists, e.g. Banks, Contractors.
Subordinate sections (for example, on the fig. 159 the current section has the
section named Bank as its subordinate with Our current accounts command
defined for it).
All the commands are arranged in groups:
Important
Normal
See also
144
Fig. 159. Navigation Panel Setup
To add a command to the panel, highlight it in the list of available commands and
click Add >.
To add all the available commands to the panel, click Add all >>. You can also
move commands between lists by double-clicking a section in the list.
To remove commands from the panel, use Remove and Remove all buttons.
The sequence of commands is managed using the arrows on the command bar of
the list of selected commands (see fig. 159).
To add a command from the list of available commands to the group of selected
commands, highlight it and click Add to group.
To move a command to a required group in the list of selected commands, highlight
the command and click Move to group or drag the command to the required group
with your mouse. If a group or a subsection is highlighted at this moment, the
operation is applied to all the commands in the group/subsection.
The setup dialogs support dragging of commands between lists and multiple selection.
NOTE
If a command is included into a subsection, it can only be moved to another group

as part of the subsection it belongs to. For example, on the fig. 158 the Our current
accounts command can only be moved to the group Important of the Bank subsection.
The exception is the group See also that may contain any commands.
To apply the selected settings and close the form, click OK.
Note that the order can only be customized for commands.
11.1.4. Action Panel

The arrangement of commands on the action panel is customized in the Action panel
settings.
145
Fig. 160. Action Panel Setup

The commands to create new objects (for example, Contractor) in the standard
New group.
The commands to open reports (for example, Report on Mutual Settlements)
in the standard Reports group.
Commands to open data processors in the standard Tools group.

Other commands created in the configuration.
Action panel is customized in the same manner as the navigation panel (see above).
11.1.5. System Commands Area of the Main

and Auxiliary Windows
To add or remove buttons from the standard command bar of the main or auxiliary
windows, click Other buttons. In the menu that opens hover your mouse over Add
or Remove buttons and in the displayed menu check or uncheck the name of the
command.
Fig. 161. Setup of auxiliary window command bar
146
A checked command will be displayed in the system commands area of the

window.
An unchecked command will be hidden from the area.
To resume the initial view of the panel, use Panel reset menu item.
11.1.5.1. Auxiliary Window Toolbar Customization

The toolbars of an auxiliary window are customized using the Toolbars setup item
of the context menu opened on the command bar of the window.
The Toolbars setup dialog contains two tabs.
Toolbars Tab
This tab is intended to select and edit toolbars.
Fig. 162. Toolbars setup dialog
Toolbars that are currently displayed on the screen are checked in the toolbar
list. Checking the row with a toolbar name will display the selected toolbar while
unchecking it will hide the toolbar.
When this dialog is opened for the first time, a toolbar list will contain only the
system toolbars and those created during configuration development.
You can restore edited system toolbars to their original state. To do so, highlight
the name of a system panel in the list and click Reset.
Commands Tab
You can change the toolbar contents and button location to organize the toolbars
more conveniently. Editing is performed using the Commands tab of the Toolbars
setup dialog.
147
Fig. 163. Selecting commands from a category
All of the buttons that can be located on toolbars are divided into several categories
for convenience. The list of categories is located in the upper left part of the tab.
If you select a category name from the list, a set of buttons that are included in this
category is displayed in the right part of the tab. You cannot modify this set.
Click a button to learn its purpose. A button description will be displayed in the
bottom of the tab.
All the actions involved in editing a toolbar are carried out by moving toolbar items
with your mouse.
Drag a button to a toolbar to add it to this toolbar. Buttons can be added by dragging them within a toolbar and between toolbars.
To remove a button from a toolbar, move it anywhere in the program window.
11.2. Form Setup

Custom form setup can be available in 1C:Enterprise. Unless otherwise defined in
the configuration, using All Actions Change Form on the forms command bar
will open an editor window (see fig. 164).
The left portion displays a structure of form elements as a tree. The right portion
displays a list of properties of a selected form element.
The content and appearance of a form are defined by the assortment of elements
included in the form (that can belong to several types).
groups (several types)
tables
fields (several types)
buttons
148
Fig. 164. Form Setup
These elements have properties that affect their display on the form. Hierarchy of
the elements defines their layout on the form.
A user can change the assortment of elements, their positions with respect to each
other, their grouping and properties.
Relocation of elements. To relocate elements in hierarchy, use the Up and Down
buttons or drag an item to the required location with your mouse.
Element properties. For every element properties are configured in the form
element properties. Description of every property is displayed in the bottom of the
panel when this property is highlighted.
Visibility Setup. To change visibility of elements on a form (show or hide them),
use check boxes near the elements. Note that it is impossible to toggle visibility
of the root Form element and form setup button. Also it is impossible to toggle
visibility of the command bar that includes the Change Form button.
Creating groups. To add a group to a form, select the Form root element in the
structure tree and click Add group. In the group properties select the required type
(Standard group, Pages, Command bar).
Adding fields. Some fields may have Add fields button available. This means that
the data displayed in the field/column have attributes that can also be displayed in
the field/column. To add the field attributes to the form, click Add fields and select
the required attributes in the window that opens.
Applying settings. The settings are applied either when the editor is closed by
clicking OK or using the Apply command. At this moment the settings are stored in
the infobase so they can be used later when the form is opened.
or earlier and recover the form settings defined in the configuration. To do so, select
149
the Set standard settings command from the All Actions menu. This command does
not cause an immediate change of the form. After executing this command you can
continue customization. The settings are only applied when you click OK or Apply.
11.2.1. Sample Form Setup

Let us consider the procedure of form customization using the form of the Sales
document as an example.
Fig. 165. 'Sale' document form
Suppose that we need to display the part number and the supplier of goods in the
table named Goods. To do so, we will use All Actions Change Form in the form of
the document.
In the setup form we will expand the group named Tabular sections group Goods,
select Goods field and click Add fields as shown below.
Fig. 166. Adding fields in form settings
150
In the window that opens select the fields Part Number and Supplier as shown
below.
Fig. 167. Selecting fields
And click OK. In the form setup dialog we will also click OK or Apply. The Sales
document will change its view as follows:
Fig. 168. 'Sales' document form
Suppose we need to display the region of the supplier of goods. To do so, we will
select Supplier field in the form settings and click Add fields. In the window that
opens we will select the Region field and click OK.
The table structure will change as follows:
Fig. 169. Table structure in the Sales document
151
Now let us group the columns of the table. To do so, we will create two groups
in the Goods table (by clicking Add group). One of the groups will display the
information about the goods: fields Goods and Part Number. The other group will
display the information on the supplier: Supplier and Region fields. Now let us
define an order for display of fields in the columns using the arrows on the setup
form panel.
The structure of the document table will change as follows:
Fig. 170. Table structure in the 'Sales' document
And the modified form will look as shown below:
Fig. 171. 'Sales' document form
When the quantity of goods is changed in the Quantity column, the row sum and the
total document sum are recalculated automatically. This means that the Recalculate
button is not needed. Let us hide the Recalculate button in the form settings by
152
unchecking visibility near the Recalculate button as shown on the fig. 172 and
click OK.
Fig. 172. Selecting invisibility for recalculate button
The command bar of the document form will look as follows:
Fig. 173. 'Sales' document header
Usually the Sales documents only list indivisible items. This means that we do not
need precision of two decimal digits in the Quantity (Total) column.
Hence, in the form settings we will highlight Quantity (total) field and in the Format
property we will press the selection button as shown in the figure.
Fig. 174. Opening format string designer
In the format string designer window that opens check Precision and click OK. Now
let us apply the form settings.
153
The Sales document will look as follows:
Fig. 175. Resulting form of the Sales document
In this manner, in the 1C:Enterprise mode you can join related elements into groups,
position them in a convenient order, hide the elements that are not required and
change the display settings of the elements on a form.
11.3. System Options

The system options setup dialog is intended to customize debugging modes by the
developer or the administrator.
To open 1C:Enterprise system parameters setup dialog, use Tools Options
command of the main menu.
Fig. 176. Options setup dialog
154
This dialog helps set up the following parameters:

Form opening mode In separate windows or tabs. This setting goes into effect
after the program is restarted. For details on modes for opening, see section
Debugging allowed in the current session. If this checkbox is selected, you can
debug in the instance of 1C:Enterprise currently running.
Enable debugging on startup. If this checkbox is selected, debugging will be
enabled the next time application instances are launched.
Display performance indicators. If this checkbox is selected, these indicators are
displayed in a separate window at the lower left part of the screen (by default).
Simulate server call delay. This setting is used to test the configuration in slowchannel connections.
Display All functions command If this checkbox is selected, the All functions
command that enables different actions is added to the menu. All configuration
objects are included in the list regardless of whether they are included in the
system interface or not. This setting is available if a user is authorized to use the
All functions mode.
For details on how system settings impact operation, see "The 1:Enterprise 8.2.
Developer Manual".
11.4. Window Layout Management

Multiple auxiliary windows can be opened during operation in addition to the
main window. The platform supports window layout management and navigation
between windows.
To open window layout management dialog, use Windows All Windows item of
the main menu. The dialog will display a list of all the currently opened windows.
To switch to a required window, select it from the list and click Go to. The Windows
dialog is closed automatically.
To close multiple windows simultaneously, select them with your mouse while
holding Shift down and click Close windows. It is impossible to close the main
window using this dialog.
Also to switch between windows within the same session, you can use the keyboard
shortcuts Ctrl+Tab, Ctrl+Shift+Tab, Ctrl+Shift+F6. To switch to the next active
window, press Ctrl + Tab or Ctrl + F6. To switch to the previous window, press
Ctrl+Shift+Tab or Ctrl+Shift+F6. At that opened modal and locking windows
are taken into account: if a window is overlapped by a locking window, this window
will not be activated.
In the tab mode, a list of windows includes all open tabs as well without any
description of their actions. For details on the tab mode, see section "Working in
the Tab Mode" on page 40.
155
11.4.1. Windows of Text and Spreadsheet Documents

In addition to various forms that are used for accounting purposes, 1C:Enterprise
supports operations with text and spreadsheet documents (reports and spreadsheet
documents created by a user). For these types of windows, menu items that provide
additional services can be used when viewing and editing.
The Split Window Horizontally and Split Window Vertically items can be used to view
various parts of a window within one window. These menu items are only available
if a text or a spreadsheet document window is active. The selected window is split
into two equal parts. If you want to change the proportion, place the mouse pointer
to the window separator. Depending on the type of the selected separator type, the
mouse pointer is changed into double vertical or horizontal arrow. Left-click and
move the mouse to change the subwindows size.
Undoing splitting of the text editor. Select Windows Remove Window Split
menu item or drag the separator line to one of the text editor borders to cancel splitting of the window.
11.4.2. Restoring Window Position

You can change the location, size and status of windows. When a window is closed,
the latest window display options are saved, and when this window is reopened, the
most recent display options are used.
To restore the initial location, size, and status of the window, select Windows
Restore window position from the main menu. The stored display options are reset,
and the original options are restored.
156
Chapter 12
Getting Help
The help content can be used to obtain information on 1C:Enterprise system and
specific objects and modes (Help menu item or F1 key). The main menu includes
the Help submenu.
When you open help from a specific mode, the help section is displayed that corresponds to the current run mode. The Content menu item and Shift + F1 keyboard
shortcut are intended to open the general help table of content.
12.1. Help Window

Help window consists of two parts. The upper part includes a toolbar used to navigate and search for information. The help contents are shown under the toolbar.
If the text does not completely fit in the window, scroll bars will appear to the right
and below the window that can be used to display the invisible parts.
Fig. 177. Help window
158
In the top part of the window, under the heading, a toolbar is located containing the
buttons for navigating through topics.
12.1.1. Viewing Help Information

To find the required topic, you can use the table of contents. In the Help window,
select the Contents button.
The left portion of the window will display a tree of topics.
Fig. 178. Help content
The tree of help topics is generated automatically and includes system help and
configuration help. Help may contain guidelines on working with specific sections
of the program.
For convenient viewing, you can expand or collapse the tree or individual
branches.
+ (plus) icon in the branch node indicates that this branch can be expanded. To do
so, it is sufficient to click the icon or double-click the name of the topic next to the
icon. The next level of the branch will be opened for viewing, and the + (plus) icon
will be changed into - (minus). To collapse tree branch, click the - (minus) icon.
In order to expand all the tree branches at once, select the root topic name with your
keyboard or mouse and press * (gray asterisk) key located on the number pad.
The first level of the tree includes section names.
By expanding branches of the topic tree one by one, you can go to the description
of a specific data item.
To navigate through the topics, you can use the topic tree or the control panel
buttons in the Help window.
To view the text of a specific topic, select the topic name in the tree with your
mouse or arrow keys on your keyboard and press Enter. The viewing window will
display the text of the selected topic.
Chapter 12. Getting Help
159
To navigate through the description text, you can use arrow keys or the PgDn and
PgUp keys.
For a large amount of text, the scroll bars to the right and below the window can be
used to move to display the unseen portions of the description.
The buttons in the Help window toolbar allow you to quickly move from one topic
to another.
Fig. 179. Help window toolbar
The Next button is intended to open the succeeding topic. In the topic tree, the
corresponding branch will be opened, and the highlighting will move along the
topic titles, showing the current location in the tree. To go to the preceding topic,
use the Previous button.
If you need to abort loading of a help page in the process of operation, you can do
so with the Abort page load command.
When a topic with the description of the 1C:Enterprise script element has been
found and the help window is open, use the Find current element in the tree button
in the command bar to search for the topic in the tree.
If you select multiple pages for viewing, you can use the Go forward and Go back
commands to return to the previously viewed pages.
The program saves the history of help topics viewed. To return to the previously
viewed topic or to move to the next viewed topic in the history, select the movement history buttons.
12.1.2. Searching for Help Information

There are several ways of searching for help content, as described below.
Search by index. The Help window allows you to search for help content by index.
In the toolbar, select the Index button. The left portion of the window will display
the help topics index (see fig. 180).
In the top row, there is an text box used to type the topic name. A sorted list of
topics is located below. Begin typing the topic name. As you type, the topic title
with the first characters matching those being typed will be highlighted.
If the desired topic is found, press Enter. In the Help window, the help contents for
the given topic will be displayed.
160
Fig. 180. Opening Help index
If there are multiple descriptions for this topic in the help content, a list of these
descriptions will be displayed in the Select Topic window.
Fig. 181. Help content selection
Select the desired chapter and click Show.

Tip
You can also use the keyboard shortcut Alt+Shift+F1 to open help index.
Search in help. To find topics containing a specified string, select Help Search
Help. A window will be displayed allowing you to search using random description
161
text. The upper part contains a field to enter the search string and a field containing
the list of description topics found.
To begin the search, start typing the text. While you are typing, the system searches
for topics where the entered text is present. Search is not case-sensitive; only whole
words of the text are matched (unless the * operator is used), with morphology taken
into account. Search operators can be used (see "Format of Search Expressions"
below).
While you are typing, the program displays the list of corresponding topics. If the
entered text is not found anywhere, the program displays appropriate message under
the text box.
Fig. 182. Search in the Help system
When you open a topic, the program shows the description in such a way that the
first occurrence of the specified text is visible.
To view a topic, select it from the list and press Enter. The description of the
selected topic will be shown in the nearby field.
Tip
You can also use the keyboard shortcut Alt+F1 to search in help.
12.1.3. Format of Search Expressions

You can search by several words, exact phrases, or using search operators.
By default, search with synonyms or fuzzy search are not carried out. To search in
these modes, you should use appropriate operators.
162
The search operators listed in the table below are allowed in the text box.
Operator
Space
AND
&
OR
|
,
NOT
~
Example
entry document
entry AND document
entry & document
entry OR document
entry | document
entry, document
closing NOT month
closing ~ month
NEAR/[]n
Example 1:
right NEAR/3 user
Example 2:
right NEAR/+3 user
Example 3:
right NEAR/-3 user
NEAR
NEAR
Library NEAR named

NEAR Dostoyevsky
""
"document posting"
()
(posting | statement) &

(of account, document)
docu*
Details
All the topics will be found that contain both the word
"entry" and the word document with morphology taken into
account
All the topics will be found that contain at least one of the
words "entry" and "document" with morphology taken into
account
All the topics will be found that contain the word "closing"
but do not contain the word "month" with morphology taken
into account. ~ cannot be used in the beginning of the
string
Searches for a topic that contains the specified words separated by n words (with morphology taken into account).
The sign determines where the second word should be
located with respect to the first word (+ after the first word;
- before it).
If no sign is specified, the search will retrieve the text that
contains the words separated by n words. Their order is not
important.
The example 1 will result in finding the topics where the
word "user" is located before or after the word "right" and is
separated from it by a maximum of three words.
word "user" is located after the word "right" and is separated from it by a maximum of three words.
word "user" is located before the word "right" and is separated from it by a maximum of three words
Short form. The query will find all the topics in the short form
where both words are contained; the words are separated
by a maximum of 8 words and located in any position
Searching for exact phrase taking into account the
morphology (equivalent to: "posting NEAR/+1 document")
Word grouping (any number of nesting levels)
Searches using a wildcard (replacing the end of the
word). More than one significant character must be
entered. The "docu*" query will find "document" as a
noun, "document" as a verb, "documentary" etc. (If the
search index includes more than 300 words starting with
"docu", the user will be prompted to refine the query.)
While using search in help, the * character may be located
in any place of the word and can be used unlimited number
of times, e.g. "*OC*nt*"
If no operators are specified (words entered with spaces), the application will search
for all the words from the query using the AND operator.
note 1
The AND, OR, NOT, NEAR operators must be entered in upper case only.
163
NOTE 2
Operators must not be used on their own (at the beginning of the search string).
For example, it is impossible to select all the topics without the specified text.
NOTE 3
All the characters in the search field except for search operators, letters, and digits
are ignored. To search for special characters that are used in the text, they should
be enclosed in quotation marks. Example: "ObtainNomenclatureData()".
12.1.4. Printing Descriptions

To print any topic description:
In the description window select the topic to be printed and click anywhere in
the text for an insertion point to be displayed;
Highlight the required text and copy it to the clipboard;
Paste the copied text to any text editor and print it.
12.2. About 1C:Enterprise Window

The About 1C:Enterprise window is opened using Help About item of the main
menu or by clicking the i button in the system commands area.
Fig. 183. Opening 'About 1C:Enterprise' window
This window displays general information about the 1C:Enterprise system and
specifications for launching the system.
Fig. 184. 'About 1C:Enterprise' window
164
The window displays the following data:

Information on the current 1C:Enterprise version;
Information on the configuration you are currently working with (name and
configuration version);
Information on the infobase the user is currently working with:
Infobase name as defined in the infobase list of the 1C:Enterprise startup
dialog;
database format (format for saving information): file or client-server;
The directory that contains the infobase and the information on infobase
regional settings.
Application (run mode: Thick client, Thin client, and Web client). Also displayed
are connection speed and data compression mode (without compression,
standard, forced).
The name of the user currently working with the program. If the current users
full name is specified and it does not match the nickname, the current users
name is shown in the format Nickname; Full Name.
The data on infobase and session localization.
Clicking the Technical support information hyperlink displays an error log
in a new window. For more details on an error log see page 139.
You can copy the information displayed in the window to the clipboard using
a context menu command.
Chapter 13
Using Web Client

This chapter covers operation of 1C:Enterprise web client.
To be able to access the infobase via a web client, the infobase should be located on
a special server.
A web client operates in a web browser. The following browser types are supported:
Mozilla Firefox 3.x, 4.x or higher for Microsoft Windows and Linux.
Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0, 7.0, 8.0 or 9.0 for Microsoft Windows. It is
recommended to use version 7.0. The web client may not operate efficiently
under Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0.
Google Chrome 4.08.0 for Microsoft Windows.
Safari 4.0.5 or higher for Microsoft Windows and Mac OS X.
Mobile Safari for iPad in iOS 3.2, 4.2 or higher. It is recommended to use
version 4.2 or higher.
Warning!
For web client operation under Windows XP SP 2, you will need to have jscript.dll
system library version 5.6.0.8834 or later. The library is located in the system32
directory of the operating system. If you have an earlier version of the library
installed on your computer, web client performance may be significantly slower.
To update the version, you will need to download the update pack available at
http://support.microsoft.com/kb/942840/enus.
13.1. Web Client Startup

To launch the web client, enter the infobase address as follows to the web browser
address bar:
http://host
where host is an address of the site corresponding to the infobase.
166
When the infobase is loaded, the address bar will automatically have a combination
of characters added formatted /aa_BB, where aainterface language identifier, and
BB country identifier.
You can launch the web client and navigate to an external link simultaneously.
When you enter an external link to the web browser address bar, the application
will be loaded and the data of the link will be opened.
For details on links, see "Links" on the page125.
NOTE 1
When Internet Explorer is used, it is recommended to open external links in a new

empty browser window.
Note 2
If the required parameters (defining pop-up window operation and switching

between the windows) are not set, a browser mode setting dialog displays when
a web client is first launched in Mozilla Firefox. Clicking the Enable button introduces any necessary changes into the browser settings, and the application will
continue loading. Pressing the Exit button quits the application.
13.1.1. Web Client Window

In the web client the command interface of the application looks similar to the thin
client interface.
Fig. 185. Main window of the web client
Chapter 13. Using Web Client
167
When you navigate to various areas of the application (sections, lists, etc), the
history of such movements is stored in the main window of the web client.
To exit the application and go to an empty page, select File Exit in the main menu
of the main window.
13.1.2. Specific Features of Printing

The web client print form includes a How to configure print options hyperlink near
the Print button that displays the respective help topic. This topic describes setup of
print in the web browser where the print process is initiated.
13.1.3. Operations with Files

There are some specific features of working with files in the web client that are
related to specifics of security models of the web browser.
The dialog windows that are displayed when you load or save files are different for
every web browser.
All the operations with the file system (downloading a file from the server,
uploading a file to the server, deleting a file, etc.) are executed interactively only.
Depending on the configuration, the application interface may include a command
that enables advanced files operations extension.
For details of configuring the advanced files operations extension for Microsoft
Internet Explorer and Mozilla Firefox web browsers see page173 and page174.
NOTE
It is impossible to drag files to the web client window.
13.2. Specific Features of the Web Client

There are some specific features of web client operation that are described below.
13.2.1. Saving Documents

For web browser security reasons, all the operations with the file system require
specific confirmation from the user.
If advanced files operations extension is installed, when files are saved to a disk,
the web client will display the warning Get file <Path> from server?
If advanced files operations extension is not installed, standard browser dialog will
be used to save files.
168
13.2.2. Operations with Tabs

If you use Internet Explorer 7 or Internet Explorer 8 as your browser and have
tabs opened, Ctrl + Tab keyboard shortcut switches between browser tabs instead
of switching between application windows. If tabs are disabled, switching can be
executed without limitations using all the keyboard shortcuts (Ctrl+Tab, Ctrl+F6).
In Mozilla Firefox you cannot activate a window using a keyboard shortcut by
default. Additional customization is required to use this feature. For details on web
browser setup, see "Mozilla Firefox Configuration" on the page174.
13.2.3. Operations with Windows

In Microsoft Internet Explorer a modal window blocks all the parent windows
while in Mozilla Firefox only the parent window of this specific window is
blocked. At that the remaining windows of the application are dimmed and while
you can switch to these windows, you cannot execute any actions in them.
When a modal window is opened, Microsoft Internet Explorer stops refreshing
the display of the main window. Behavior of the remaining window is similar to
that in Mozilla Firefox.
When a user tries to close a window which is blocked by another window in
the web client, a standard browser alert containing the following message is
displayed: This window may only be closed after all windows opened from it are
closed! Choose Cancel to quit closing of the window.
The web client window cannot be sized under a specific size defined by the web
browser used.
In some situations where other clients open a menu or selection list to select a
value, the web client will open a new window.
Details menus of reports that are generated using data composition system, are
displayed as a new web browser window.
When a user is working with several monitors, web client windows behavior can be
described as follows:
The main window behavior depends on the browser window behavior (when
the user is working with several monitors).
Any auxiliary, blocking or modal windows open in the same monitor as the last
active window.
13.2.4. Other Specific Features
13.2.4.1. Selecting Slow Connection Mode

To choose the slow connection mode, select Tools Options in the main menu.
In the options dialog check Set slow connection mode on startup. The slow connection mode will be enabled when the web client is launched next.
169
NOTE
When you launch an infobase from the web browser address bar, =Low option
can be used to select slow connection mode.
13.2.4.2. Operations with Files

File New of the main menu only allows to create text documents.
File comparison mode is not supported.
The list of last opened files is not supported.
Dragging files to web client forms is not supported.
13.2.4.3. Graphical Schema

The web client supports opening, saving and printing of graphical schemas.
Graphical schemas cannot be edited.
13.2.4.4. Operations with Spreadsheet Documents

Editing of spreadsheet documents in the web client is not supported. At that you can
dock a table and displays groups using respective commands of the Table menu.
If a non-empty cell of a spreadsheet document has Auto selected for text location,
the cell is merged either to the next filled cell or to the end of the spreadsheet document horizontally.
Also when you work with a spreadsheet document, the following specific features
exist:
Interactive commands that customize display of the spreadsheet document are
not supported.
In a cell of a spreadsheet document the text will always be displayed horizontally.
Background pictures are not displayed in a spreadsheet document.
Patterns are not displayed for spreadsheet document cells.
Scrolling by pressing a mouse scroll wheel is not supported in spreadsheet
documents or tables of forms.
In a spreadsheet document if empty cells exist after a populated cell (to the
next populated cell or to the end of spreadsheet document row), the cells are
displayed as merged.
In Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 and 7 if merged cells have a left border
defined but bottom border is not, the border will not be displayed to the bottom
border of the merged cell.
170
Printing a Spreadsheet Document

By default, a spreadsheet document is printed in PDF format by the web client. To
print the document in HTML, select the HTML radio button in the Print method
group of the system settings (Tools Options of the main menu).
Fig. 186. Print method
13.2.4.5. Picture Field

The picture preview window in the web client there are no commands for scale.
The Stretch proportionally command of the Size submenu allows you to stretch the
picture proportionally the borders of the window.
13.2.4.6. Status Window

In Mozilla Firefox status is refreshed upon every server query and upon comple-
tion of the 1C:Enterprise script command execution.
13.2.4.7. Notifications
In a web client notifications are displayed within current window.
If a notification is displayed in an auxiliary window and this auxiliary window is
closed, the notification will be displayed in the main window.
13.2.4.8. Window Activation

In Internet Explorer 8 in certain situation when you switch to an already opened
window the dialog will be displayed: Click OK to navigate to the window. You will
be switched to the window after you click OK in this dialog.
171
13.2.4.9. Other Specific Features

Application cannot be aborted with Ctrl+Break where such abortion is possible
in other clients.
You cannot customize display of chart, dendrogram, graphical and geographical
schemas.
Customization is limited for Gantt chart.
A text that does not fit a table cell is not accompanied by ellipsis points on the
right.
Only a limited set of fonts available in the operating systems used is supported
in the web client. Other fonts cannot be selected in the font selection dialog in
the web client. When they are used, they are replaced with supported fonts.
Main menu is accessed using F10, while accessing it by clicking Alt once is not
supported.
In a web browser it is impossible to select a scale for display other than 100 %
or to use an irregular dpi.
When lengthy operations are executed, cursor is not changed in the situations
when such changes occur in other clients.
In Mozilla Firefox the presentation of navigation panel and action panel that
does not fit the panel size is not accompanied by ellipsis points to the right.
In Microsoft Internet Explorer the presentation of action panel that does not fit
the panel size is not accompanied by ellipsis points to the right.
When a calendar is opened from a text box, the calendar resizing mode is
not disabled if the mouse button is released outside of the window where the
calendar was opened. To disable the resizing mode, click and release the left
mouse button again in the window that contains the calendar.
In Mozilla Firefox and in some situations with Microsoft Internet Explorer, the
color of scroll bars of an HTML document field will correspond to the color
specified in the operating system.
Commands of action undo and redo behave in a manner that differs from other
clients in multiline text boxs. In web client the volume of undo changes is
defined by the web browser used.
When you press Shift + Del in multiline text box, the entire line is deleted while
automatic splitting of line by the text box border is ignored.
If a tooltip text includes line splitters, Mozilla Firefox display spaces instead of
them.
In some situations when Internet Explorer 6.0 is used and a file is downloaded
from server, an empty window may remain displayed on the screen.
When one is working with multistring text boxs and a text document field, the
following commands are available in the Edit menu: Find, which is for searching
values,and Replace, which is for replacing values in the field.
172
Google Chrome and Safari do not support external components, file system
extensions or extensions for cryptoprotection.
Google Chrome and Safari do not support the Insert command in the shortcut
menu. This shortcut menu option is not available.
Link navigation dialogs in Google Chrome and Safari do not contain the Insert
from clipboard button. When opening a link navigation dialog, the clipboard
value is not inserted into a link text box.
Google Chrome and Safari do not support automatic user authentication with
OS tools.
Google Chrome and Safari do not allow one to edit headers/footers when
printing documents.
In Safari, the web client interface language matches the web browser interface
language (unless it is overridden by the launch settings).

In Safari, the size of the calendar and calculator windows may not be less than
the minimum window size allowed for that browser.
There is no print/preview settings dialog in Google Chrome.
When one is navigating between the windows with the hotkeys or trying to
open an already opened document including in other similar cases in Google
Chrome 7 and below the following message is displayed after switching to a
new window: "Window is navigated. Click OK to continue".
The Chrome browser under Windows does not support switching between web
client windows by clicking Ctrl+Tab or Ctrl+Shift+Tab.
The Safari browser (Windows) does not allow one to set the preferred language.
Therefore unless the language is explicitly specified in the web client launch
string, OS interface language will be used.
When one is opening a new window by pressing the Ctrl key in Safari
(Windows), the window is opened in a new tab (not in a separate window)
by default. It is recommended to change this behavior by selecting Settings
Preferences Tabsand unchecking Ctrl-click opens a link in a new tab.
The Next/Previous commands in HTML document fields in Google Chrome and
Safari do not navigate the content set as a string (only the content set with URLs).
13.2.5. Working on iPad

The Formatted document control functions only in the Read Only mode.
Dragging is not supported.
Navigation to the main window with auxiliary windows opened is not
supported.
Printing is not supported.
No context menu is displayed for text boxs.
Use the button for closing in the upper right corner of the main window to quit
the web client.
173
A quick double-click in the same screen area is used instead of the left double-
click. A long click (over 1 second) is used instead of the right-click.
Working with windows in the tabs is not supported.
The following dimensions are increased to improve convenience:
String height in a table

String height in a drop-down list of an text box
Button width in an text box
Calendar
No scrollbars are provided for the following controls (move your finger over
the element area to scroll):
Table
Spreadsheet document
Drop-down list of an text box
HTML document
Navigation panel
Messages panel
Help window
13.3. Microsoft Internet Explorer Setup

In order to use a web browser, you need to set up the configuration. To do so, select
Internet Options from the Tools menu and edit settings as follows:
Enable JavaScript scripts:
On the Security tab select Custom level for the zone where the web site is
located;
In the Scripting section for Active scripting select Enable.
Enable pop-up windows:
On the Privacy tab in the Pop-up Blocker section uncheck Block Pop-ups.
Enable cookies:
On the Privacy tab choose the level of cookies use not higher than Medium
High with the controller available.
To work with external components the web browser should be configured as
follows:
On the Security tab click the Custom level button;
In the window that opens check Enable for the following options:
Automatic prompting for ActiveX controls

Download signed ActiveX controls
Run ActiveX controls and plug-ins
Script ActiveX controls marked safe for scripting
174
Every time an auxiliary window is opened, keyboard layout is selected according to

the operating system settings. If the layout does not match the data entry language, you
will need to specify the required entry language in settings to avoid language switch.
The following actions will let you set a default entry language:
open Regional and Languages Options settings of the operating system;
On the Languages tab in the Text services and input languages section click
Details...;
In the window that opens on the Settings tab in the Default input language
section select the language you need;
Click OK.
13.3.1. File System Extension Setup

Implementation for Internet Explorer requires that a special ActiveX component
to be installed 1C:Enterprise 8.2. Extension for operations with files for Internet
Explorer (x86) or its 64-bit version for 64-bit Internet Explorer. The component is
included in the platform, but the application must be able to support its installation.
If the user is not authorized to install the component, this can be done instead by the
administrator.
In order to be able to work with the component, the browser should have the rights
granted for installation and use of signed ActiveX controls for the zone where the
web site is located.
Note
To ensure correct operation of the file system extension, use Microsoft Core XML
Services (MSXML) 4.0 or 6.0 library.
For a list of MSXML module versions, installation limitations and recommendations see http://support.microsoft.com/kb/269238.
13.4. Mozilla Firefox Setup

To be able to use Mozilla Firefox web browser, the following settings should be
applied:
1. From the Tools menu select Options.
On the Content tab apply the following settings:
Uncheck Block pop-up windows;
Check Enable JavaScript.
On the Privacy tab apply the following settings:
Check Accept cookies from sites.
For detailed settings of accepting or blocking cookies click the Exceptions
button and follow the instructions in the dialog that opens.
Click OK.
175
2. Launch 1C:Enterprise web client by entering the infobase address to your web
browser address bar. In the main menu of the web client select Tools Web
Browser Setup. This will display the Web Browser Setup dialog.
To work with the operating system clipboard, advanced files operations
extension and external components, check Enable operations with clipboard,
advanced files operations extension, external components.
To be able to use non-Latin characters in the web browser address bar (for
example, to navigate 1C:Enterprise links), check Enable non-Latin characters
in command line options.
To enable activations of windows with keyboard shortcuts, check Enable
keyboard to switch between application windows.
Operating system authentication is set by checking the Use operating system
authentication checkbox. In some cases, additional modification of browser
settings may be required: specify a list of websites supporting operating
system authentication in the network.negotiate-auth.trusted-uris and network.
negotiate-auth.delegation-uris parameters. To set these parameters, enter
about:config in the browser address bar, and then enter the parameter names
and specify a list of websites as parameters in the filter list.
Note
For additional information on operating system authentication setup in Mozilla

Firefox, see https://developer.mozilla.org/en/Integrated_Authentication.
To apply the selected settings, click OK in the Web Browser Setup dialog.
13.4.1. File System Extension Setup

If a web browser setup dialog is opened with the Set file system extension
command of the Tools menu, the program prompts you to select the Allow working
with a clipboard, file system extension, and external components checkbox before
the setup dialog is opened.
13.4.2. Language Settings

If the platform interface language differs from the web browser interface language,
for correct operation of the web client the configuration is required as follows (location of settings is quoted for version 3.5):
1. In the main menu select Tools Options.
2. In the window that opens on the Contents tab in the Fonts & Colors group click
Advanced.
3. For the Default Character Encoding option select Unicode.
176
NOTE
When Mozilla Firefox stores user decision on granting privileges and you want to
modify the decision, you will need to edit prefs.js located in the user profile folder
of Mozilla Firefox.
For information on locating the profile folder, see: http://support.mozilla.com/en-US/
kb/Profiles Next you will need to perform the procedure as follows:
1. Close Mozilla Firefox.
2. Open prefs.js file using any word processor.
3. Locate the string UniversalXPConnect in the code. The following code fragment will be retrieved:
user_pref("capability.principal.codebase.p<XX>.granted", "UniversalXPConnect");
user_pref("capability.principal.codebase.p<XX>.id", "<URL>");
user_pref("capability.principal.codebase.p.<XX>subjectName", "").
Or:
user_pref("capability.principal.codebase.p<XX>.denied", "UniversalXPConnect");
user_pref("capability.principal.codebase.p<XX>.id", "<URL>");
user_pref("capability.principal.codebase.p<XX>.subjectName", "").
Where <XX>is a random number while <URL>is the address of the required
website. If <URL> is different, continue searching for the "UniversalXPConnect" string further on in the code.
4. Delete the found strings from the code.
13.5. Google Chrome Setup

Before using this web browser, set the following Internet Options.
Open the Tools menu, select Options, press the Content settings button on the Under
the Hood tab and then set the required parameters.
Enable cookies: at the Cookies tab, select the Allow local data to be set
(recommended) checkbox or set exceptions.
Enable Java scripts execution: on the JavaScript tab, select the Allow all sites to
run JavaScript (recommended) checkbox or set exceptions.
Enable pop-up windows: on the Pop-ups tab, select the Allow all sites to show
pop-ups checkbox or set the exceptions.
It is recommended to set file saving parameters. To do so:
Open the Tools menu, select Options.
Select the Ask where to save each file before download checkbox in the
Downloads section of the Under the Hood tab.
177
13.6. Safari Setup

Before using this web browser, set the following browser options.
Open the Safari Settings menu, select Preferences and then set the required parameters:
Enable Java scripts execution: on the Security tab select the Enable JavaScript
checkbox;
Enable cookies: on the Security tab in the Accept cookies group select the Only
from sites I visit checkbox;
Enable pop-up windows: on the Security tab clear the Block pop-up windows
checkbox.
It is recommended to set file saving parameters. To do so:
In the Safari Settings menu select Preferences;
On the General tab select the Always prompt before downloading checkbox.
Note
Safari for Mac OS does not prompt the user to specify the location to save the
file.
178
Chapter 14
Slow Connection Mode

The slow connection mode is intended to use the application using a slow communication path (e.g., using a GPRS modem). The operation speed and traffic volume
are optimized by increasing the number of server queries and abandoning transfer
of insignificant information.
The connection speed is defined in the infobase adding and editing dialogs (for
details, see "1C:Enterprise 8.2. Administrator Guide"), in the infobase options when
client is launched (for details, see "Connection Speed Selection" on the page25.
Selection of slow connection mode is visible in the interface by absence of icons of
sections on the sections panel.
When you begin working, the commands of the desktop are displayed along with
an empty work area that contains the hyperlink Show desktop. If you need to work
with desktop forms, you should open the desktop using this link.
When working with data in the slow connection mode, you should bear in mind
that a server notification of closing a form that locks some data is sent 20 seconds
later or simultaneously with a query to open another form.
In this mode when you select data for an text box from a list or when you use string
input, instead of reading data from the database each time the previously received
data will be used where possible. If new data appear in a database and you need to
select them while they are not displayed in the list yet, you should repeat selection
for the text box (by clicking the selection button again without moving to another
field) or update the list (using the Update command or pressing F5 in the selection
list form). Also when you type from the keyboard in an text box, the selection list is
not opened automatically. To open the list, press the Down Arrow button.
180
Chapter 15
Ordinary
Application Mode
This chapter covers operations with the configurations designed specifically for the
ordinary application mode or created on the platform version 8.1.
15.1. Interface
In the ordinary application mode the main window of the application significantly
differs from that visible in the managed application mode. In general, it may look
as shown below:
Fig. 187. Main window of the ordinary application
182
The main menu includes commands for operations with files, editing, opening
forms of configuration objects, etc.
The toolbars include commands to open standard and service features. To navigate
to lists and infobase objects, use the Operations menu and toolbar buttons provided
that it is defined during configuration development.
15.2. Operations Menu

The Operations menu is used to navigate to lists and infobase objects as well as to
open service features. When you select a type of object in the Operations menu, the
list of existing objects of this type will be displayed. Select the name of the required
object from the list and click OK. The form of the selected object will be opened in
a new window.
15.2.1. List Customization
15.2.1.1. Filtering and Sorting a List

To customize a list that is displayed in a table (lists of objects, journals and document lists, etc), use the Filter and Sort dialog that is opened when you select Set
Filter Parameters.
Setting a Filter
Some lists allow data to be filtered by attribute values. This lets you view only the
data that have a certain value in the filtered attribute. For example, you can display
all the contractors that are defined as individuals.
You can filter data by a specified set of attributes.
A data filter is defined by filter type, comparison type and filter value.
Filter types means the criteria defined during configuration development. When
filtering, a user can apply only those filter types that were defined during configuration development. For example, the Contractor type can serve as a filter type.
The comparison type indicates how filter will be applied. The assortment of available comparison types is determined by the data type.
It is possible to filter data containing dates after a given date, in an interval of dates
belonging to the list or, vice versa, not belonging to the list, etc.
A filter value can be any of the available values of the attribute, for example,
Individual. The filter type and value together are the filter criterion. A filter condition must be unique at any given moment.
Note that most lists support filtering by one or multiple attributes. If a list does not
support filters, the menus and toolbars will not contain interface controls to manage
filters.
Chapter 15. Ordinary Application Mode
183
When a filter is set, the list form window will display only the elements that satisfy
the selected filter conditions.
Filters can be set for list data in multiple ways.
Manual filter setting. You can set the filter criterion yourself, meaning that you
select both the filter type and its value.
To set the filter manually, select Set Filter Parameters.
This menu item and button may be unavailable if the user is not granted the right to
set a filter themselves.
When you enter the filter setup mode, a dialog opens where you should select the
filter type and its specific value. The list of filter elements is determined when the
task is configured for every list type. You can specify or change it using software
tools prior to opening the form.
For example, the list setup for a document journal can be as follows:
Fig. 188. Setup of document journal list
To define a filter criterion, select the attributes, specify their values and comparison
type. For example, suppose the attribute is Warehouse Documents, the value is
Main Warehouse, and the condition is Not equal.
There is a field intended to enter the filter value to the right of the list of filter types
in the dialog. The input format depends on the value type. For example, you should
enter a numeric value to filter by a numerical attribute or select a company from the
corresponding list to filter by a company. After you have entered the filter value,
click OK.
For some filter types it is impossible to enter the value directly because they include
values of various types.
If you set the filter for hierarchical data, the contents of the list depend on the view
mode. If the hierarchical view is set, the filter criteria are not applied to folders, i.e.
all the catalog folders are displayed. If a non-hierarchical view is set, only those
items are displayed that meet the filter criteria.
184
For hierarchical data, you can set a hierarchy comparison type. If you select the
In hierarchy comparison type, the system checks whether the value belongs to
the folder. If you select the Not in hierarchy comparison type, the system checks
whether the value does not belong to the folder.
When you change a list filter for all the registers subordinate to the recorder, the
order can be replaced with the one that is optimal for the filter if such filter was
defined by the system when the list was initially opened. For example, if a filter by
the recorder is applied, the order by row number is set while if filter by recorder is
cancelled, the order by date is applied instead.
Filter by Current Value
When you analyze the data entered into a table box, you might want to filter it by
specific value of the current cell. You can do so using the Filter and Sort dialog. To
simplify the process, you can also use the dedicated command, Filter By Current
Value, or the corresponding button of the command bar.
The command is available if it is possible to filter this column of the table. For such
columns you will see the Filter By Current Value button available in the command
bar.
To filter by a value, select the cell containing this value and then click Filter By
Current Value. The command initiates filtering, and the button is displayed as
pressed.
Filtering by a value is equivalent to filtering by this column while specifying a
single value and the Equal to filter criterion.
To cancel filtering by value, select the cell containing this value and click Filter By
Current Value again.
You can filter by value sequentially (first one column is filtered by the value, then
another one and so on).
If a filter other than filter by value is applied to a column, the Filter By Current Value
button is not displayed as pressed, and filtering by value will change the criteria of
the previous filter.
Filter Clearing
To disable a filter, select the Clear filter menu item. In this case, all the list records
will be displayed.
Defining Presentation Order

You can specify an order for the selected objects to be displayed on the Sort tab.
185
Fig. 189. Customizing a list sorting
There are two lists on the tab. In the left list, you define a set of attributes to define
the order of data display, the attribute action sequence (priority) and sort direction
for every attribute. You select attributes from the list on the right. You compose the
list and specify the sequence of applying attributes and direction for sorting using
the buttons.
If multiple attributes are specified, at first the data is sorted by the first attribute
according to the selected sort direction, then the data sharing the value of this
attribute is sorted by the second attribute according to the selected sort direction,
and so on.
If you want the customized sorting to be applied when this form is opened, check
Use these sort settings on open.
15.2.1.2. List Customization

You can manage data update and customize the order of columns in the list, their
visibility and the behavior of the list upon opening in the List Options dialog. This
dialog is opened using Actions List Options command.
Fig. 190. Dialog of customizing columns display in a list
186
You can customize the display of columns on the Columns tab. Set the order of
columns in the list using the Move Up and Move Down buttons.
Use the Apply button to view the results of the selected settings.
To restore the default settings, click the Standard Order button.
Important!
If customization or repositioning (by dragging or in a dialog) is disabled for a

column during configuration development or using scrip tools, such columns cannot be customized. It is also impossible to insert columns between two columns
that are not allowed to be repositioned.
On the Other tab you can set up restoration of the list position when it is opened,
select a position in the list for when it is opened and customize automatic list
update.
Fig. 191. Customization of additional list parameters
If Restore position on open is checked, the row that was active when the list was
previously closed, will be active when the list is reopened.
If you select Start or End as the value for On open go to, the first or the last row
becomes active when list is opened depending on the specified condition.
The data displayed in a list can change not only when they are interactively entered
by the user, but also when other objects are created and during operation in multiuser mode. It is often necessary that the list data remains valid without additional
user activity.
If you check Update automatically every, the system updates the list periodically
after the interval specified in the text box to the right of the check box. The main
purpose of this setup mode is to ensure automatic refreshment of the list data at
187
a specified frequency. We recommend using this mode only for individual list forms
processed concurrently by multiple users, when immediate viewing of their work
results is required. Such situations are, however, quite rare in practice. Therefore
the auto update setting is usually not needed.
If Do not filter new strings is unchecked, when a new row is entered that does not
meet the requirements of the currently applied filter, the appropriate message will
be displayed.
The Set Hierarchical View on open check box is only available for customization of
hierarchical lists. This check box is intended to manage hierarchical view in a form.
The status of the check box corresponds to the state of the Hierarchical View button
of the command bar.
15.2.2. Reports
15.2.2.1. Report Settings Wizard

The report settings wizard provides multiple relatively simply options for report
customization for the user to select from. This wizard is convenient when you need
to customize a report without going into all the details because the wizard makes it
possible to only select the major settings for every type of report items.
When you launch this wizard, all the previous manual settings may be lost, so a
message is displayed reading: Manual settings will be lost. Do you want to continue?
If you click Yes, the data composition settings wizard is launched.
Fig. 192. Data Composition Settings Wizard
188
Select the required type of data arrangement and click Next. If you do not need to
customize the remaining parameters, click OK.
Fig. 193. Selecting fields in a report
In the field selection window that opens, select the fields that you want to be
displayed in the report. You can use buttons or dragging. You can sort the selected
fields using arrows.
To proceed to the next window of settings, click Next.
For Table type of report, you can set groupings in rows, columns or tables. For
Chart type of report, groupings can be in series, points and tables.
In the window that opens select the fields and type of groupings they can serve as:
No hierarchy only data of items;
Hierarchy data both from folders and items;
Hierarchy only data display by folders.
When you click Next>, the wizard prompts you to select the field to order by.
Fig. 194. Selecting a field to order by
189
You select them in the same way as grouping fields. For every field, you have to
define a sort direction.
For List and Table types of reports, customization of parameters by the settings
wizard finishes here. For Chart type of report, after you have clicked Next>, you
will need to select the chart type.
Fig. 195. Selecting a chart in the report settings wizard
After you close the data composition settings wizard, the saved settings become
available for further editing in the report setup window.
15.2.3. Report Setup

A report includes customizable settings. In this situation the term "Settings"
includes:
report structure
assortment of fields included in a report
assortment of fields included in groupings
filters
sorting
conditional appearances
other settings
Settings can be modified in a new window that is opened when you click Settings
in a report (if the button is provided for during configuration development).
190
Fig. 196. Report settings setup form for 'Report on Nomenclature'
A form that is used to edit settings includes a table box of the report structure, a
command bar to select the customized item and a set of settings arranged in
tabs. You can either customize the entire report or its individual items, including
nested items. You can switch between various setup modes using the Report and
<Structure item> buttons (the label of the second button depends on the selected
structure item). The buttons on the command bar of the report setup form provide
for saving to file or restoring it from an XML document or for opening the report
settings wizard.
Management of report settings is in general similar to management of report variant
settings.
15.3. Service Features
15.3.1. Options Setup

Various parameters for 1C:Enterprise operation are set using the Tools Options
menu item.
Options are used to customize operation of various program modes for a specific
user. This means that when multiple users work with a single infobase, the values
of options are set independently for each user. Most options are saved at the end of
a session and are automatically restored when the system is restarted.
All customizable options are united in several groups; you can switch between them
by clicking various tabs of the Options dialog.
191
After you edit values of options click OK for them to be applied. The new values
of options will be applied and the options window will be closed.
The Apply button can also be clicked to set new values for options; if this button
is clicked, the options window remains open.
Click the Cancel button to exit the options window without applying the changes.
15.3.1.1. General Options

Setting Working Date. The working date is used when a date is to be set and an
explicit date is not given. For example, the working date is automatically set as
the date of a new document when it is first created.
If Use local computer date is checked, the date applied is the computer system date.
If it is unchecked, a new working date can be set.
15.3.1.2. Text Editor Setup

The controls of the Texts tab can be used to manage the 1C:Enterprise built-in text
editor.
Drag and drop text. You can use the drag and drop mode to copy and move text
blocks.
Allow cursor beyond end of line. If this option is checked, the cursor can be
positioned after the ends of lines of text. Otherwise, the cursor position is limited
to the Line Break symbol.
Show spaces and tabs. If checked, space and tab symbols will be displayed in the
text. This option is used to verify the text formatting. With Show spaces and tabs
checked, the Space and Tab properties become available for you to select display
of characters representing spaces and tabs.
Space. Specifies the symbol used to display spaces.
Tab. Specifies the symbol used to display tabs.
Replace tabs with spaces when typing. If checked, when text is being entered,
the tab character will be replaced by the number of spaces defined in the Tab width
property.
Tab width. Defines the number of characters that corresponds to a tab character
during text input.
Autoindent. Enables or disables auto indent when Word wrap is entered (when you
press Enter).
Font. Specifies the font to be used for entered text. We recommend using a fixedwidth font for module code (for example, Courier).
192
15.3.1.3. Help Display Setup

The radio button used for setup of help display is located on the Help tab.
If Display in one window is checked, help information is displayed in one window.
If Display in different windows is checked, help information is displayed in multiple
windows.
15.3.1.4. System Settings

The System tab contains debug mode connection controls. Use radio buttons only if
you debug configuration performance.
If Enable debugging in the current session radio button is checked, the debug mode
is applied and this debug item is included into the list of available items (the Designer
mode). Note that you cannot uncheck this option after applying the settings.
If you want to enable debugging only for the next launch, check Set the Enable
Debugging Mode on Startup.
15.3.2. Toolbars
A toolbar is a panel with a set of buttons. Clicking any of the buttons with your
mouse immediately executes the associated command. Each button usually has an
icon that represents the command assigned to this button.
In ordinary application 1C:Enterprise has two types of toolbars: docked and
floating.
Docked toolbars usually contain buttons for operations with information in a
specific window. Their position is fixed (usually under the window header), and
they cannot be modified by the user.
Floating toolbars usually contain buttons for general-purpose commands that are not
windows-specific. The number of toolbars that are placed in the main 1C:Enterprise
window simultaneously can vary depending on the program run mode. You can
also create your own toolbars from predefined set of buttons.
Floating toolbars can be placed in any convenient location: attached to any side
of the application window or "pinned" anywhere on the screen. When a toolbar is
moved, its future location is marked with an inverted rectangle.
15.3.3. Toolbar Types

In the ordinary application mode 1C:Enterprise can include the following types of
floating toolbars:
system toolbars
toolbars created during configuration development
toolbars created by users
193
System toolbars. These toolbars are built into the program and cannot be deleted
by either the 1C:Enterprise or the Designer tools. You can add or delete buttons on
these toolbars, but the software will "remember" their configuration and can restore
it upon request.
Toolbars created in the process of configuration setup. These toolbars are
created during configuration development and contain commands for operations
with specific data items: documents, journals, reports etc. They can be changed and
restored like system toolbars. These toolbars can only be deleted when working in
the Designer mode.
User toolbars. Users can create their own toolbars when working in 1C:Enterprise.
Such toolbars are created from built-in sets of buttons. You can create any number
of these toolbars.
15.3.4. Toolbar Management

To manage toolbars, use Tools Settings item of the main application menu.
The Settings dialog contains two tabs.
15.3.4.1. Toolbars Tab

The controls on this tab are used to create, edit and delete toolbars.
Fig. 197. Toolbars setup dialog
Toolbars that are currently displayed on the screen are checked in the toolbar list.
You can display and hide toolbars by checking and unchecking them in the list.
When this dialog is opened for the first time, a toolbar list will contain only the
system toolbars and those created during configuration development. When a user
creates new toolbars, their names are added to the list.
194
15.3.4.2. Creating Toolbars

To create a toolbar, go to the Toolbars tab and click Create Enter a new toolbar
name when prompted. When you click OK, a new toolbar is created, initially
without any buttons.
15.3.4.3. Renaming a Toolbar

You can rename only custom toolbars.
To rename a toolbar, select it, click Rename and enter a new name. When you
select a name of another toolbar from the list or close the dialog using the Close
button, the new name will be assigned to the toolbar.
15.3.4.4. Deleting a Toolbar

You can only delete custom toolbars.
To delete a toolbar, select it from the list and click Delete. The toolbar will be
deleted without any additional warning.
15.3.5. Temporary Lock

Temporary lock mode is intended to prevent unauthorized use of the 1C:Enterprise
system when the user is absent.
Often, a specific configuration relies on the log in name of a user to identify document authorship. Frequently, a user is responsible for his or her actions. Therefore
it is important to prevent users from doing any actions under the name of other
users during the session. In this case, a temporary lock can be used.
Temporary lock mode only makes sense when the user has been assigned a password.
To enter temporary lock mode, select Tools Temporary lock menu item. The
1C:Enterprise application window is collapsed.
To resume work, you should click the application shortcut. A password entry dialog
box will appear.
Fig. 198. Password entry dialog during temporary lock
The password should fully match the one entered when the system was initially
launched. When a correct password is entered, the system becomes available for work.
195
15.4. Setting User Options

In the 1C:Enterprise mode, you can change the password and select interface
language. To do so, select Tools User Options menu item.
Fig. 199. User options setup
Enter the password into the field labeled Password. A password is an arbitrary
combination of alphanumeric characters. A password should not contain spaces or
special characters. The maximum password length is 255 characters.
When you enter a password, it is displayed in asterisks; therefore you should pay
attention to what you are typing.
Re-enter the password in the Confirm password field to avoid possible erratic entry.
If the password confirmation does not match the originally entered password,
clicking OK will display a warning: Password and password confirmation do not
match and the password will not be set.
Click the Cancel button if you decide not to set a password.
Warning!
You cannot view the user password. Therefore, you should pay extreme attention
to selecting a password.
15.5. Saving Event Log

In the ordinary application mode you can save event log data to a file in compliance
with a special format.
To save the event log, open it and select File Save Copy menu item. A dialog box
will be displayed to browse to the directory and the file that will be used to dump
the records as well as to select the file type (the event log file extension *.elf is
assigned by default). You can also dump the log in XML format.
15.6. Window Layout Management
15.6.1. Window Panel

The Window Panel is displayed in the bottom of the application work area.
196
The window panel includes shortcuts of the opened windows that are displayed
in normal layout mode (see "Window State (Layout Mode)" on the page 198).
Click a window shortcut to activate the required window.
The window panel can be hidden. To do so, open the context menu on the window
panel, main menu, toolbar or status bar and uncheck Window Panel. Check this
check box for the panel to be displayed.
If you do not want the window panel to always occupy part of the applications work
area, you can enable Autohide mode. In this mode, the window panel is hidden. To
show it, hover your mouse over the panels location for it to be displayed.
15.6.1.1. Window Setup Dialog

This dialog is used to work with the list of open windows. It can be used to switch to
a selected open window, to save changes, to manage the arrangement of windows,
or to close one, several or all the open windows.
To open the dialog, select Windows Windows menu item. This dialog displays
the list of currently open windows. Only the windows with Ordinary status are
included in the list.
If the contents of an open window are modified, this window will be marked with
an asterisk (*) symbol in the list, to the left of the window name.
All the actions are applied to one or multiple windows specified in the list. You can
select or deselect multiple rows in the standard manner.
Actions that can be performed with one open window or a group of windows are
described in the following table.
Button
Action
Activate
Makes the selected window active

Saves the changes for some types of documents
(e.g., text and spreadsheet document) that support
this action
Closes all the selected windows
Manages window arrangement on the screen.
Horizontally arranges the selected windows
from left to right.
Vertically arranges the selected windows from
top to bottom.
Cascade arranges the selected windows in a
cascade
Attaches two windows
Detaches attached windows
Closes the Windows dialog
Save
Close windows
Place
Join
Detach
OK
Number of selected
windows (condition)
One
Any
Any
More than one
Attachment permitted
Any
197
15.6.2. Service Windows

When working in the 1C:Enterprise, the service windows are used to provide
collateral information to the user. These windows include:
Immediate window
Message window
This paragraph deals with general methods of working with service windows, as
well as specific features of the listed windows.
15.6.2.1. Immediate Window

Sometimes when working with the 1C:Enterprise a value of a parameter needs to
be monitored. To do so, use an immediate window a special window that reflects
the calculation results of the formulas entered into the window. An immediate
window can be opened using the Tools Immediate window menu item.
As a rule, the immediate window is used by the system administrator, that is, by
the user who knows the 1C:Enterprise script and understands what functions can be
used when performing calculations in the immediate window.
The immediate window is a table box where you can enter a formula into every row
and get the result by pressing Enter.
Formulas may include arithmetical expressions, expressions using 1C:Enterprise
script functions and procedures, and application module and shared module functions and procedures.
Enter each expression on a separate row in the first column of the table. The calculation result is displayed in the second column to the right of the expression. If an
invalid formula is entered, the following error message will be displayed: Error in
expression!
Data in the immediate window can be arranged on tabs. You may define if a tab
should be displayed by checking or unchecking the Tabs item in the context menu.
You may copy calculation results to the clipboard (Copy Result item in the context
menu of the second column).
If the source data for the expressions changes during processing, you should refresh
calculations to obtain valid results. To do so, use Recalculate or Refresh All items
of the context menu of the immediate window.
To clear the contents of a row in the immediate window, highlight it and press Del.
15.6.2.2. Message Window

In addition to prompts and dialogs, 1C:Enterprise features a special message
window to provide you with various information. This window is automatically
opened when required.
198
An icon describing the importance of a message is displayed near every message in

the left portion of the window.
A message window can be closed at any time. Note that the information displayed
in the window will be lost.
15.7. Window State (Layout Mode)

Windows can be laid out on the screen in various modes, including:
normal layout where a window is displayed only inside the work area of the
application;
floating layout, where a window can freely move around the screen (not only
within the work area of the application);
docked layout, where a window is "pinned" to the borders of the work area of
the application;
hidden: you can hide a window if you are not working with it at the moment.
A state for windows of text and spreadsheet documents, and HTML-documents can
be selected. It is also available for the windows with a special state defined in the
configuration.
Context menu commands in the window header can be used to select a layout state.
Floating windows are always displayed on top of windows in all the other modes.
If multiple windows are in the Floating mode, the active window will always be
displayed on top of the other windows.
Windows in the Floating mode can be attached to each other. If a pair of windows in
the same mode have the Connectable property enabled (in the context menu of the
window header), these windows can be attached to each other. To attach windows
in the Normal mode with Floating property enabled, press Shift when moving the
windows. You can also attach windows that are already attached to each other.
If Connectable property is disabled, you cannot select the Docked or Hidden
modes.
For the Docked and Hidden modes, the Connectable property is always enabled and
cannot be changed.
The Docked mode requires special discussion. In this mode a window may be:
attached (docked) to one of the borders of the Designer window;
attached (docked) to any border of any other window with the Docked property
enabled;
displayed above any other docked window (stacked windows).
If the Docked mode is enabled for a window, this window is attached to one of the
borders of the work area or to another window in the Docked mode.
199
To modify the size of a docked window, move the mouse cursor to a free border
(turned to the work area). The cursor will change into a double arrow (horizontal or
vertical). Drag the border with the mouse.
If a window is in Floating mode, when you drag its border close to a work area
border or to another Docked window, the window borders may change right away.
If you release the mouse button at this time, the window will attach to a new border
and its state will be changed to Docked.
You can change the state of docked windows by dragging them with your mouse.
To drag a window, left-click and hold the window header and drag the window to
another location. The window state will be changed to Floating.
There are several ways to attach multiple docked windows to the Designer window
or another window border. Windows can be arranged in layers where each window
occupies the entire width of the work area of the Designer window or another
window. It is possible to arrange windows in sequence, so that each window will
be located in one layer along the border of another window. If there are more than
two windows docked, you can arrange some of them to be stacked in layers and the
others in sequence.
To arrange one docked window above another (create stacked windows), proceed
as follows:
grab the window header with the mouse;
drag the window so that its header fits over the header of another docked
window. The dragged window should have a tab contour at the bottom;
release the mouse button.
Now tabs will show up at the bottom of the docked window. The tab text will be the
same as the text in the window headers. Docked windows are contained in tabs.
Click a tab to open the corresponding window. Clicking Close in this arrangement
only closes the currently active tab.
To detach docked windows, drag one of the windows away (you can monitor the
process by watching the contour of the dragged window).
If the mouse pointer remains in the tab area, you can change the tab order in this
way.
If some windows are docked to each other, you can attach more windows to them
by dragging new windows to the tab area instead of the header. You can specify the
tab order in this way.
If Hidden mode is selected, an additional line appears on one side of the work area.
This line contains window tabs, including a tab for the current window attached to
this side of the work area. The location of this line is determined by the window
location in the Docked mode. In this mode a window remains on the screen while it
is active. Once another window is activated, the previous window becomes hidden.
200
To display this window, move the mouse cursor over the tab of this window (do not
click). When the mouse is moved away from the window, the window is automatically hidden.
Appendix 1
Data Composition
System Expression
Language
The data composition system expression language is intended for writing expressions used in various portions of the system, e.g. in data composition settings, to
describe expressions of custom fields.
Literal Constants
An expression can contain literal constants. Literal constants can be as follows:
String
Number
Date
Boolean
String
String literal is enclosed in double quotation marks (").
"String literal"
If you need to use double quotation marks within a string literal, use two such
characters.
"Literal ""in quotation marks"""
202
Number
A number is written without spaces, in decimal format. Its fractional part is separated by a period (.).
10.5
200
Date
A Date literal is written using the DATETIME key literal. This keyword is followed
by a year, month, day, hours, minutes, and seconds in brackets separated by
commas. Time is not required.
DATETIME(1975, 1, 06) January the sixth, 1975
DATETIME(2006, 12, 2, 23, 56, 57) The Second of December, 2006, 23 h 56 m 57 s
Boolean
Boolean values can be written using True and False literals.
Value
To specify literals of other types (system enumerations, preset data), use the VALUE
keyword followed by the literal name in brackets.
VALUE(AccountType.Active)
Fields
Expressions can use fields of data sets. A field is identified by data path. Parts of
data path are separated by a period (.). Field name is not case sensitive.
Nomenclature.Article
Sales.SumTurnover
Parameters
Expressions can use parameters. To use parameter in expression, simply write its
name preceded with & character.
&Contractor
&BeginDate
1.1. Operations with Numbers

Unary
This operation is intended to change the sign of a number to its opposite.
Sales.Quantity
Appendix 1. Data Composition System Expression Language
203
Unary +
This operation does not perform any actions with numbers.
+Sales.Quantity
Binary
This operation is intended for calculating the difference of two numbers.
BalanceAndTurnovers.OpeningBalance BalanceAndTurnovers.ClosingBalance
BalanceAndTurnovers.OpeningBalance 100
400 357
Binary +
This operation is intended for calculating the sum of two numbers.
BalanceAndTurnovers.OpeningBalance + BalanceAndTurnovers.Turnover
BalanceAndTurnovers.OpeningBalance +100
400 + 357
Multiplication
This operation is intended for calculating multiplication of two numbers.
Nomenclature.Price * 1.2
2 * 3.14
Division
This operation is intended for obtaining a result of dividing one operand by
another.
Nomenclature.Price / 1.2
2 / 3.14
Remainder from Division

This operation is intended for obtaining a remainder from dividing one operand by
another.
Nomenclature.Price % 1.2
2 % 3.14
1.2. Operations with Rows

Concatenation (Binary +)
This operation is intended for concatenation of two rows.
Nomenclature.Article + ": "+ Nomenclature.Description
204
LIKE
This operation checks whether the line matches the transferred template.
The value of the LIKE operator is True if the expression value matches the template,
and False otherwise.
The following characters in template string make sense, different from a next line
character:
% percent: a sequence containing zero or more random characters;
_ underscore: a random character;
[] one or more characters in square brackets: any character listed within
the square brackets. Enumerations can contain ranges, such as az, meaning a
random character within the range, including limits of the range;
[^] negation mark in square brackets, followed by one or more characters:
any character besides those listed after the negation mark;
Any other character represents itself only and does not have any additional use. If
you must use one of the listed characters as itself, it must be preceded by ESCAPE.
For example, the template below means a substring including the following
sequence of characters: the letter A; the letter B; the letter C; a digit; one of the
letters a, b, c or d; an underscore; the letter a; the letter b; the letter c. This sequence
can start anywhere in the string.
"%ABC[0-9][abcd]\_abc%" ESCAPE "\"
1.3. Comparison Operations

EQUAL
This operation is intended to compare two operands for equality.
Sales.Contractor = Sales.NomenclatureMainSupplier
NOT EQUAL
This operation is intended to compare two operands for inequality.
Sales.Contractor <> Sales.NomenclatureMainSupplier
LESS THAN
This operation is intended to check that the first operand is less than the second.
CurrentSales.Sum < PreviousSales.Sum
MORE THAN
This operation is intended to check that the first operand is greater than the second.
CurrentSales.Sum > PreviousSales.Sum
205
LESS OR EQUAL
This operation is intended to check that the first operand is less than or equal to the
second.
CurrentSales.Sum <= PreviousSales.Sum
MORE OR EQUAL
This operation is intended to check that the first operand is greater than or equal to
the second.
CurrentSales.Sum >= PreviousSales.Sum
IN Operation
This operation is intended to check presence of a value in the transferred list of
values. Result of the operation is True, if the value is found, or False otherwise.
Nomenclature IN (&Product1, &Product2)
Operation to Check Value Presence in Data Set

Operation is intended to check value presence in the specified data set. The data set
for checking must contain one field.
Sales.Contractor IN Contractors
The Operation for Checking the NULL value IS NULL

This operation returns the True value if the value is the NULL value.
Sales.Contractor IS NULL
The Operation for Checking a value for Inequality to NULL IS NOT NULL
This operation returns the True value if the value is not the NULL value.
Sales.Contractor IS NOT NULL
Logical Operations
Logical operations are accepted as operands of Boolean type expressions.
NOT Operation
The NOT operation returns True if its operand has the False value, or False if its
operand has the True value.
NOT Document.Consignee = Document.Shipper
206
AND Operation
AND operation returns True if both operands have the True value, or False if one
of the operands has the False value.
Document.Consignee = Document.Shipper AND Document.Consignee = &Contractor
OR Operation
OR operation returns True if one of the operands have the True value, or False if
both operands have the False value.
Document.Consignee = Document.Shipper OR Document.Consignee = &Contractor
1.4. Aggregate Functions

Aggregate functions perform certain actions on a set of data.
SUM
The SUM aggregate function calculates a sum of expression values transferred as
an argument for all detailed records. The Array function result may be used as a
parameter.
SUM(Sales.SumTurnover)
COUNT
The COUNT function calculates the number of values that are different from the
NULL value. The Array function result may be used as a parameter. For instance:
COUNT(Sales.Contractor)
COUNT (DISTINCT)
This function calculates the number of distinct values. The Array function result
may be used as a parameter.
COUNT(DISTINCT Sales.Contractor)
MAX
This function obtains the maximum value. The Array function result may be used
as a parameter.
MAX(Balances.Quantity)
207
MIN
This function obtains the minimum value. The Array function result may be used
as a parameter.
MIN(Balances.Quantity)
AVG
This function obtains the mean value for values other than NULL. The Array function result may be used as a parameter.
AVG(Balances.Quantity)
ARRAY
This function returns an array that contains a parameter value for each detailed
record. If an expression specified in the parameter contains an Array function, this
expression is considered an aggregate expression. An arbitrary-type expression will
be specified as a parameter for this function.
The value that returns a table of values may be used as a parameter. In this case, the
Array function will result in an array that contains values from the first column of
the value table transferred as a parameter.
ARRAY(ClauseCount)
VALUETABLE
This function returns a value table that contains the number of columns that matches
the number of function parameters. Detailed records are produced from data sets
necessary for obtaining all the fields used in function parameters expressions.
If an expression contains a ValueTable function, this expression is considered an
aggregate expression.
The function may have one or more arbitrary-type parameters. Each parameter may
be followed by an optional AS keyword and a name to be assigned to a value table
column.
ValueTable(Different Nomenclature, NomenclatureCharacteristic

AS Characteristic)
GROUP PROCESSING
This function returns a DataCompositionGroupProcessingData object with the
following properties:
Data. Type: a value table. The function populates this property with a value
table containing the calculation results for the expression specified in the first
parameter of the function for each group entry of the group. If the group is
208
a hierarchy, each hierarchical level is processed separately, and hierarchical

entry values are also included in the data.
CurrentItem. A row in the table of current values. When a user calls
a CurrentItem for the overall, it will contain the Undefined value. The function populates this property with a value table string for which the function is
currently being calculated.
ProcessingTempData. A structure where data subtotals may be placed.
Properties will be assigned unique names in different functions, since the same
DataCompositionGroupProcessingData object may be transferred to
several different functions in some scenarios.
This function has the following parameters:
Expressions. A string containing comma-separated expressions to be
calculated. Each expression may be followed by an optional AS keyword and
a column name in the final value table.
HierarchyExpressions. Expressions to be calculated for hierarchical entries.
Similar to the Expressions parameter, but used for hierarchical entries. If the
parameter is not set, expressions specified in the Expression parameter are
used to calculate values for hierarchical entries.
GroupName. Name of the group in which processing group will be calculated.
A string. Calculation is performed in the current group, unless otherwise specified. If values are calculated in a table and the parameter contains an empty string
or is not specified, the value is calculated for the group, i.e. a string. Template
composer replaces this name with the group name in the final template when
generating a data composition template. If the group is unavailable, the function
will be replaced with the NULL value.
GroupProcessing (Sum(SalesVolume)
GROUPBY
This function deletes duplicates from an array. It returns an array or a value table
with no duplicates.
Parameters:
Array or a value table.
Value table column numbers or names where duplicates will be searched.
All columns by default. (Comma separated).
GETPART
This function returns a value table that contains specific columns from the original
value table.
209
Parameters:
A value table to get columns from.
Column names or numbers to get (comma separated).
Returned value: a value table that contains only columns specified in the Column
numbers/names parameter.
ORDER
Used for ordering array elements.
Parameters:
Array or ValueTable.
Value table column names or numbers to order by. No number needs to be specified for an array. Order direction Autoorder required. Desc/Asc + Autoorder.
Returned value: an array or a value table with the ordered elements.
JOINSTRINGS
An aggregate function to join strings.
Parameters:
Values to join into one string. If this is an array, array items will be
joined into a string. If this is a value table, all columns and rows will be joined
into a string.
Item separator. A string that contains the text to be used as a separator
between array elements and value table rows. The line feed character is used by
default.
Column separators. A string that contains the text to be used as a separator
between value table columns. "; " is used by default.
1.5. Other Operations

CHOICE Operation
The CHOICE operation is intended to choose one of several values under certain
conditions.
CHOOSE When Sum > 1000 Then Sum Else 0 End
Rules for Comparing Two Values

If types of compared values differ from each other, then the relationship between
the values is defined based on the type priority:
NULL (lowest)
210
Boolean
Number
Date
String
reference types
The relationship between different reference types is defined based on table reference numbers corresponding to one type or another.
If the data are of the same type, then their values are compared according to the
following rules:
for Boolean type TRUE value is greater than FALSE;
for Number type common number comparison rules are applied;
for Date type earlier dates are less than later dates;
comparison of the String type takes place according to nationally established
database features;
reference types are compared according to their values (record number, etc.).
Working with NULL Value

Any operation where one of the operands has the NULL value will result in a NULL
value.
The exceptions are:
the AND operation will return NULL only if none of the operands has the False
value;
the OR operation will return NULL only if none of the operands has the True
value.
Operation Priorities
Operations have the following priorities (the upper line has the lowest priority):
OR
AND
NOT
IN, IS NULL, IS NOT NULL
=, <>, <=, <, >=, >
Binary+, Binary *, /, %
Unary+, Unary-
211
1.6. Functions
EVAL
The EVAL function is intended for evaluating expressions within a certain grouping.
This function has the following parameters:
Expression a string containing an expression to be calculated;
Grouping a string containing a name of a grouping within which an expression is to be calculated. If an empty string is used as a grouping name, evaluation
will be performed within the context of the current grouping. If the Overall
string is used as a grouping name, a calculation will be performed within the
context of the grand total. In other cases calculation will be performed in the
context of the parent grouping with this name.
Calculation type the string containing the calculation type. If this parameter is Overall, the expression will be calculated for all the records of the
grouping. If the parameter value is Grouping, the values will be calculated for
the current group record of the grouping.
SUM(Sales.SumTurnover) / EVAL("Sum(Sales.SumTurnover)", "Overall")
In this example the result will be the ratio of sum by the Sales.SumTurnover field
of the grouping record to the sum of the same field in the entire composition.
EVALEXPRESSION
This function returns an expression for recording a specified group. This function
has the following parameters:
Calculated expression. A string that contains an expression for calculation.
Group. A string that contains the name of the group for calculating an expression.
If an empty string is used as a group name, values for the current group will be
calculated. If the Overall string is specified, overall values will be calculated. If
calculation is performed in a table and the parameter specifies the name of the
group or string, or an empty string is specified, calculation will be performed for
the group that lies at the intersection of the required calculation area (see the third
parameter description) and the current string of the column group. If the parameter
specifies the column group name, calculation is performed for the group that lies
at the intersection of the column group calculation area and the current row group
entry.
Calculation area. A string that contains the calculation area. If an empty string
is used as a calculation area, calculation is performed for the current entry of the
group specified in the first parameter. If the Overall string is specified in the parameter, calculation is performed for the overall of the group specified in the second
parameter.
212
If the parameter value is Group, values will be calculated for the current group
entry of the group.
If the parameter value is NonResourceGroup, then an expression will be calculated
for the first group entry of the original group when calculating a function for the
group entry by resources.
When one is calculating the EvaluateExpression function with the NonResourceGroup value for group entries that are not grouped by resources, the function is
calculated in the same way as if with the Group parameter value.
The data composition template composer outputs the expression calculated with
the help of the EvaluateExpression function with the specified NonResourceGroup
parameter into a template when generating a data composition template and outputting a field, which is the resource to group by, into a template. Standard resource
expressions are output for other resources in the resource group.
If the parameter contains the Hierarchy string, the expression will be calculated for
the parent hierarchical entry, if it exists, and for the whole group, if such an entry
does not exist. When generating an expression for the "% in the hierarchy group"
field, the template composer generates an expression that contains a ratio between
the resource expression and the EvaluateExpression function for the resource
expression calculated for the current group with the Hierarchy calculation type.
Start. Specifies the entry to start a segment with in which expression aggregate
functions will be calculated and the entry from which to get field values outside
aggregate functions. A string containing one of the following:
"First". Getting the first group entry is required. The expression whose result
will define the shift from the beginning of the group may be specified in brackets
after this word. The resulting value will be a positive integer. For example,
with First(3)the third entry from the beginning of the group is received.
If the first entry is beyond the group, it is considered that there are no entries.
For example, if there are 3 entries and First(4) is specified, it is considered
that there are no entries.
"Last". Getting the last group entry is required. The expression whose
result will define the shift from the end of the group may be specified in
brackets after this word. The resulting value will be a positive integer. For
example, with Last(3) the third entry from the end of the group is received.
If the last entry is beyond the group, it is considered that there are no entries.
For example, if there are 3 entries and Last(4) is specified, it is considered that
there are no entries.
"Previous". Getting the previous group entry is required. The expression whose result will define the shift back from the current group
entry may be specified in brackets after this word. For example,
with Previous(2) the previous from the previous entry is received.
If the previous entry is beyond the group (for example, receiving Previous(3) is
213
required for the second entry of the group), the result would be the first group entry.
If the previous entry is received for the total by group, the result would be the
first entry.
Next. Getting the next group entry is required. The expression
whose result will define the shift forward from the current group
entry may be specified in brackets after this word. For example,
with Next(2) the next from the following entry is received.
If the next entry is beyond the group, it is considered that there
are no entries. For example, if there are 3 entries and "Next" is
specified for the third entry, it is considered that there are no entries.
If the next entry is received for the total by group, it is considered that there are
no entries.
"Current". Getting the current entry is required.
When receiving an entry for the total by group, the first entry is received.
"BoundaryValue". It is necessary to receive an entry at the specified value.
The boundaryValue keyword will be followed by a first order field expression
in brackets, which value will start the fragment.
The first entry with an order field value exceeding or equal to the specified
value will be used as an entry. For example, if the Period field is used as an
order field, and this field has the values 01.01.2010, 01.02.2010 and 01.03.2010
and you need to receive a BoundaryValue (DateTime(2010, 1, 15)), an entry
with the date 01.02.2010 will be received.
End. Specifies the entry to continue a fragment for calculating an aggregate expression to. A string containing one of the following:
"First". Getting the first group entry is required. The expression whose result
will define the shift from the beginning of the group may be specified in brackets
after this word. The resulting value will be a positive integer. For example, with
First(3) the third entry from the beginning of the group is received.
If the first entry is beyond the group, it is considered that there are no entries.
For example, if there are 3 entries and First(4) is specified, it is considered
that there are no entries.
"Last". Getting the last group entry is required. The expression whose result
will define the shift from the end of the group may be specified in brackets
after this word. The resulting value will be a positive integer. For example, with
Last(3) the third entry from the end of the group is received.
If the last entry is beyond the group, it is considered that there are no entries.
For example, if there are 3 entries and Last(4) is specified, it is considered that
there are no entries.
"Previous". Getting the previous group entry is required. The expression
whose result will define the shift back from the current group entry may be
214
specified in brackets after this word. For example, with Previous(2) the
previous from the previous entry is received.
If the previous entry is beyond the group (for example, receiving Previous
(3) is required for the second entry of the group), it is considered that there are
no entries.
If the previous entry is received for the total by group, the result would be the
last entry.
"Next". Getting the next group entry is required. The expression whose result
will define the shift forward from the current group entry may be specified in
brackets after this word. For example, with Next(2) the next from the following
entry is received.
If the next entry is beyond the group, the result would be the last entry. For
example, if there are 3 entries and Next is specified for the third entry, the result
would be the third entry.
If the next entry is received for the total by group, it is considered that there are
no entries.
"Current". Getting the current entry is required.
When receiving an entry for the total by group, the first entry is received.
"BoundaryValue". It is necessary to receive an entry at the specified value.
The keyword BoundaryValue will be followed by a first order field expression in brackets, which value will start the fragment.
The last entry with an order field value less than or equal to the specified value
will be used as an entry. For example, if the Period field is used as an order
field, and this field has the values 01.01.2010, 01.02.2010 and 01.03.2010, and
you need to receive a BoundaryValue (DateTime(2010, 1, 15)), an entry
with the date 01.01.2010 will be received.
Sorting. A string containing comma-separated expressions to order the sequence
by. If no string is specified, the values are ordered similarly to the group for which
an expression is calculated. Each expression may be followed by an Asc keyword
to group in ascending order or a Desc keyword to group in descending order, or
Autoorder to group reference fields by fields to order the referenced object by. The
keyword Autoorder may be used with both the Asc and Desc keywords.
HierarchicalSorting. A string containing comma-separated expressions to order the
sequence by. Used for ordering hierarchical entries. The elements will be ordered
as described in the Sorting parameter, unless specified otherwise.
IdenticalOrderValuesProcessing. A string containing one of the following:
"Together" means that the previous and next entries are defined on the basis
of order expression values.
"Separately" means that a sequence of ordered entries is used to define the
previous and next entries.
215
For example, if the sequence is ordered by date.

1.
2.
3.
4.
January
January
January
January
1,
2,
2,
3,
2001
2001
2001
2001
M.
S.
P.
S.
Ivanov 10
Petrov 20
Sidorov 30
Petrov 40
When the Separately order is used to process identical values, entry 2 would be
an entry previous to entry 3, while when the Together order is used, this would be
entry 1. A fragment for the current entry to entry 2 if Separately is used would be
entry 2, and entries 2 and 3 if Together is used. Therefore, the sum of the current
entry for Separately would amount to 20, and to 50 for Together.
If Together is specified in the Start and End parameters, shifts for the First,
Last, Previous, and Next positions cannot be specified.
Separately is used by default.
Use of Parameters. Practical Examples

If you need to calculate a stacked sum, use the following expression:
EvaluateExpression("Sum(SalesVolume)", , , "First", "Current")
If you need to receive a group value in the previous string, use the following expression:
EvaluateExpression("Rate", , , "Previous")
The EvaluateExpression function takes into account group filters, but not hierarchical filters.
The EvaluateExpression function may not be applied to a group in its group
filtering. For example, you cannot use the EvaluateExpression("Sum(SalesVolume)", , "Overall") > 1000 expression in the Nomenclature group filter, but
you can use it in a hierarchical filter.
If a closing entry precedes an opening one, it is considered that there are no entries
for calculating detailed data and aggregate functions.
When interval expressions are calculated for the overall (i. e., the second
parameter of EvaluateExpression function has an "Overall" value), it is
considered that there are no entries for calculating detailed data and aggregate
functions.
LEVEL
This function is used to obtain the current record level.
LEVEL()
216
LEVELINGROUP
This function is used to obtain the level of the record in relation to the grouping
root.
LEVELINGROUP()
VALUEISFILLED
Returns True if the value does not match the default value for this type, is not NULL,
is not an empty reference, is not Undefined. For logical values it is checked for
NULL. Strings are checked for absence of characters other than space.
SERIALNUMBER
This function obtains the next sequential number.
SERIALNUMBER()
GROUPSERIALNUMBER
This function returns the next sequential number in the current grouping.
SEQUENTIALNUMBERINGROUPING()
FORMAT
This function obtains a formatted string of the transferred value. The format string
is set as defined by 1C:Enterprise format string.
Options:
Value
Format string
FORMAT(Invoices.SumDoc, "NFD=2")
BEGINOFPERIOD
This function is used to extract a certain date from a given date. Options:
Expression of the Date type;
Period Type a string containing one of the following values:
Minute
Hour
Day
Week
Month
Quarter
Year
Ten days
Six months
BEGINOFPERIOD(DATETIME(2009, 10, 12, 10, 15, 34), "Month")
Result:
01.10.2009 0:00:00
ENDOFPERIOD
This function is used to extract a certain date from a given date. Options:
Period Type a string containing one of the following values:
Minute
Hour
Day
Week
Month
Quarter
Year
Ten days
Six months
ENDOFPERIOD(DATETIME(2009, 10, 12, 10, 15, 34), "Week")
Result:
13.10.2009 23:59:59
DATEADD
This function is used to add values to a date. Options:
Increase type a string containing one of the following values:
Second
Minute
Hour
Day
217
218
Week
Month
Quarter
Year
Ten days
Six months
Size the size of date increase. Number Type. Fractions are ignored.
DATEADD(DATETIME(2009, 10, 12, 10, 15, 34), "Month", 1)
Result:
12.11.2009 10:15:34
DATEDIFF
This function is used to obtain differences between two dates. Options:
Difference type one of the following values:
Second
Minute
Hour
Day
Month
Quarter
Year
DATEDIFF(DATETIME(2009, 10, 12, 10, 15, 34),

.
DATETIME(2009, 10, 14, 9, 18, 06),
.
"Day")
Result:
2
CURRENTDATE
Returns system date. During composition of template composition all the expressions available in the composition will have the CURRENTDATE function replaced
with the value of the current date.
CURRENTDATE()
219
SUBSTRING
This function is used to extract a substring from a string. Options:
expression of string type;
the position of the character where the substring is to begin;

the length of the extracted substring.
SUBSTRING(Contractors.Address, 1, 4)
STRINGLENGTH
This function is used to define a string length. The first option is an expression of
string type.
STRINGLENGTH(Contractors.Address)
YEAR
This function is used to obtain a year from a Date type value. The only option of
the function is an expression of Date type.
YEAR(Invoice.Date)
QUARTER
This function is used to obtain a quarter number from a Date type value.
The quarter number is in the range from 1 to 4. The only option of the function is
an expression of the Date type.
QUARTER(Invoice.Date)
MONTH
This function is used to obtain a month number from a Date type value. The month
number is in the range from 1 to 12. The only option of the function is an expression of the Date type.
MONTH(Invoice.Date)
DAYOFYEAR
This function is used to obtain the day of the year from a Date type value. The day
of the year is in the range from 1 to 365 (366). The only option of the function is an
expression of Date type.
DAYOFYEAR(Invoice.Date)
220
DAY
This function is used to calculate the day of the month from a Date type value.
The day of the month number is in the range from 1 to 31. The only option of the
function is an expression of the Date type.
DAY(Invoice.Date)
WEEK
This function is used to obtain the week number from a Date type value. Numbers
of a year are enumerated from 1. The only option of the function is an expression of
the Date type.
WEEK(Invoice.Date)
WEEKDAY
This function is used to obtain the day of the week from a Date type value. The day
of the week is in the range from 1 (Monday) to 7 (Sunday). The only option of the
function is an expression of Date type.
WEEKDAY(Invoice.Date)
HOUR
This function is used to obtain the hour (24 hour clock) from a Date type value.
The hour of the day is in the range from 0 to 23. The only option of the function is
HOUR(Invoice.Date)
MINUTE
This function is used to obtain the minute number from a Date type value. The
minute of the hour is in the range from 0 to 59. The only option of the function is an
expression of the Date type.
MINUTE(Invoice.Date)
SECOND
This function is used to obtain the number of second from a Date type value. The
second of the minute is in the range from 0 to 59. The only option of the function is
SECOND(Invoice.Date)
221
CAST
This function is used to retrieve a type from an expression that can contain a
composite type. If the expression contains a type other than the required type, NULL
is returned. Options:
Converted expression;
Type the string containing the type string. For example, Number, String, etc.
In addition to primitive types, the string can also contain a table name. In this
case the function attempts to cast to the table reference.
CAST(Data.Attribute1, "Number(10,3)")
ISNULL
This function returns the second parameter value, if the first parameter has the NULL
value. Otherwise, the first parameter value is returned.
ISNULL(Sum(Sales.SumTurnover), 0)
222
Appendix 2
Text Editor
The 1C:Enterprise text editor provides users with all the basic functions needed to
edit texts. The text editor allows you to perform operations on text blocks and to
perform search and replace functions. Since operations in all the text editors are
similar, in this Appendix we describe only those features of the text editor that are
specific to the 1C:Enterprise.
2.1. Editing Text Documents

The process of editing a text document includes the following steps:
creating a new document or opening an existing document
entering and editing text
saving edited text
printing, if necessary
These steps are reviewed below in details.
2.2. Creating and Opening a Text Document

To create a new text document, use the File New menu item. Select Text
Document when prompted and click OK. An empty document will be opened in the
text editor.
Use File Open menu item to open an existing text document. The standard file
open dialog will appear.
In this dialog, select the document file. In the File type field you can select the
format of the text document to be opened.
Warning!
If a document is opened with the Read only attribute, this document cannot be
edited. If the properties palette is opened (select Change Properties), then in the
224
Status line the document property will be given as Text open for reading. If the
document Read only attribute has not been enabled, then in the Status line the
document property is given as Text open for writing.
You can simultaneously create or open multiple documents in different windows.
2.3. Selecting an Extension for a Text Document

The Text item of the main menu contains commands to specify the extension for
the text document.
Available values: Text, Text Template, HTML. The text editor mode for the field
will be selected automatically depending on the selected extension.
By default (when you create a new document), a document is assigned the Text
extension.
To learn more about editing of module texts, see "1C:Enterprise 8.2. Developer
Guide".
2.4. Inputting and Editing Text

Text is entered by typing the required characters on the keyboard. The characters
that you type in will be entered next to the cursor a blinking vertical line. When
entering and editing text, the current position of the cursor (the line number and the
position in the line) is displayed in the application status bar.
You can view the size of the document (the number of characters and lines) and the
editing mode by selecting Edit Properties.
2.4.1. Moving the Cursor

When editing text, you can move the cursor in the standard manner.
2.4.2. Go to a Text Line

To go to a specific line in a document, select Go to Line from the context menu, and
in the displayed prompt enter the line number and click Go To.
2.4.3. Using Bookmarks

In the process of editing, you can mark any lines of text to quickly access the
marked lines subsequently. These markers are called bookmarks.
To set a bookmark, place the cursor in the line of text you wish to bookmark, and
then select Text Set/Clear Bookmark. The set bookmark will be displayed as a
blue circle in the leftmost column of the text editor window.
Appendix 2. Text Editor
225
You can remove a bookmark by selecting Text Set/Clear Bookmark again when
the cursor is located in the bookmarked line.
To move between lines of text that have been bookmarked, use Text Next
Bookmark, Text Previous Bookmark. For moving between bookmarks: when you
reach the end or beginning (depending on the search direction), the next command
will move the cursor to the first or the last bookmark (loopback).
The Text Remove Bookmark command removes all the bookmarks from the text.
Bookmarks are automatically removed when a document is closed.
Bookmarks are not saved when closing the document.
2.4.4. Selecting Blocks of Text

You can select a block of text in the standard manner.
To select all the text in the document at once, select Edit Select All.
To select a single word only, use Ctrl + W keyboard shortcut.
2.4.5. Operations on Selected Blocks

You can move, copy or delete a block of text like in other Microsoft Window applications.
To format the text structure, it is useful to use text shift. Select one or more lines
of text (if you select one line, then you must select the end of the line; if there are
multiple lines, you can select them in part), then use Text Block Increase Indent
or Text Block Decrease Indent. The text editor shifts the selected lines to the
specified direction on the tab space.
2.4.6. Deleting Text

You can delete text in the standard manner.
2.4.7. Inserting a Page Break

To insert a page break, select Text End of Page. The page break will be represented by the symbol. When printing, a new page will begin in this text location.
2.4.8. Undo Changes

If you make a mistake when editing a document, the text editor allows you to automatically return the text to its previous state. To undo an action, select Edit Undo.
This will undo the last action results. The Undo Changes operation can be used
several times in a row.
To redo (restore) such actions, you can select Edit Redo.
226
2.4.9. Search and Replace

1C:Enterprise text editor allows you to find any sequence of characters in a text
document and replace it with another sequence.
Search. Use the Edit Find command to perform a search. The search parameters
dialog will open.
Fig. 200. Search parameters setup dialog
Enter the text that you want to search for into the Find field of the dialog.
Check the Match case option to make search case-sensitive. If you check the Find
whole words only option, you can only find whole words and not parts of words.
The Direction group allows you to specify the search direction: Forward to the
right and below the current position of the cursor; Backward to the left and above
the current position of the cursor.
Click the Find button after specifying the search parameters. The specified sequence
will be highlighted if it is found.
You can repeat the search in the Forward direction by selecting Edit Find Next
menu item or by pressing F3.
You can repeat the search in the Backward direction by selecting the Edit Find
Previous command or by pressing Shift+F3.
Warning!
When the search reaches the end of the document, it continues from the beginning
and vice versa.
Replace. Use the Edit Replace command to replace a string of characters.

The replace parameters dialog will open.
Fig. 201. Replace parameters setup dialog
Enter the text that you want to search for into the Find field of the dialog. Enter the
replacement text into Replace field.
Check the Match case option to make the search case-sensitive. If you check the Find
whole words only option, you can only find whole words and not parts of words.
227
Appendix 2. Text Editor
The Replace in group allows you to specify the search range within the selected
text (block of text) or throughout the entire document.
Click Find after specifying the find and replace parameters.
The searched for item will be highlighted in the text if found. To replace the located
string of characters, click Replace. The string will be replaced and search will
continue.
Click Replace All to replace all the occurrences of the required string.
Warning!
When the replace procedure reaches the end of the document, it continues from
the beginning and vice versa.
2.4.10. Saving a Text Document

To save a text document, select File Save. If you are saving the document for
the first time, a standard dialog will be displayed where you should specify the
name of the new document and, if required, the directory where it is to be saved.
You can select the file format in the File type field, just like when you open a document.
To save an existing document with a different name, select File Save As.
A standard dialog for saving files will be displayed where you should specify
the name of the new document and, if required, the directory where it is to be saved.
After saving a document under a new name, the file with the old name remains
on disk.
2.4.11. Printing a Text Document

Page Setup. In the page setup mode, you can configure a printing device, specify
paper size and orientation, etc. Use File Page Setup to open this mode. This will
display the Page Setup dialog, where these settings can be edited.
Fig. 202. Page setup dialog
228
The Printer field allows you to select one of the printers connected to your computer
for printing. By clicking the button, you can open the list of these printers and
select the required one by clicking its name in the list. You can similarly select the
paper size and the paper tray.
The Margins group allows you to indicate the distance between the edge of the sheet
of paper and the text being printed. The text that does not fit within the specified
width will be carried over to the next page.
Click OK after you specify all the required parameters to save them. By clicking the
Cancel button, you can cancel the page setup modifications.
Print Preview. The print version of a document may be previewed before printing.
Use the File Print Preview menu item for this purpose.
Printing a Document. You can print a document using a dialog for print parameters setup or without this dialog using the standard printer settings (and the current
printer). In the former situation, use the first Print line. The standard print setup
dialog will open.
In this dialog select the required print parameters (printer, page range, number of
copies) and click OK to proceed to printing.
If you want to use current print options, select File Print with current settings
(Ctrl+Shift+P).
To view the list of keyboard shortcuts used in the text editor, open Help when using
the application.
2.4.12. Closing Text Documents

You can close a text document in the standard manner.
Since text documents are mostly used to provide the user with some information,
you can simply press Esc to close a document. If the text document was not modified, it is simply closed; otherwise you will be prompted to save the document.
Appendix 3
Spreadsheet
Document Editor
You can use a dedicated spreadsheet editor to create various print forms in
1C:Enterprise.
This section will go over the main principles of working with spreadsheet documents.
3.1. Spreadsheet Documents in 1C:Enterprise

The spreadsheet editor in 1C:Enterprise looks like standard electronic spreadsheets,
however it is different.
1C:Enterprise spreadsheets, like any other spreadsheets, consist of rectangular cells
arranged in rows and columns.
Each column and row has its own unique number. Columns and rows are numbered
independently from each other. Numbering starts at 1 at the top left corner of a spreadsheet. Therefore, any cell may be identified by a row number and a column number.
In addition, some cells and cell ranges (rectangular groups of cells) may be named,
for convenience. Use the Names window and properties palette to assign names
and manage them.
The top cell of a column is referred to as the column header. It contains the column
number and can also be used to highlight a column and to change column width.
The leftmost cell of a row is referred to as the row header. It can be used to perform
all the actions on it as on the column header.
A spreadsheet document can be generated by the application (for reports or data
processor) or by a user. It can be saved (if required) to disk in a file. Spreadsheet
documents are usually ready print forms that can be used independently.
230
3.2. Operations with Spreadsheet Documents

The 1C:Enterprise spreadsheet editor can be used to create, view and edit spreadsheet documents.
Reports usually display the results of data processing in the form of a spreadsheet
document.
The user can also create a new spreadsheet or view reports previously saved to a
file as a spreadsheet document.
Regardless of the documents origin, the spreadsheet editor is used to edit such
spreadsheets.
3.3. Creating and Opening Spreadsheet Documents

Use the File New menu item to create a new spreadsheet document. Select
Spreadsheet Document in the prompt and click OK. An empty document will be
opened in the spreadsheet editor.
Use File Open menu item to open an existing spreadsheet document. The standard
file open dialog will appear.
Select the document you need in this dialog. In the File type field you can select the
format of the spreadsheet document to be opened.
3.4. Saving Spreadsheet Documents

You can save any spreadsheet document to a file so that you can open, view and
print it later on. To save a spreadsheet document, select File Save. When saving
a new document, a save file dialog is displayed prompting you to enter the name
of the file and the directory where it is to be saved. When saving an existing edited
text document, this dialog will not be displayed.
To save a spreadsheet document under a different name or in another format, select
File Save As.
Spreadsheet documents are usually saved in a special format used by 1C:Enterprise
to store spreadsheet documents. These files have the *.mxl extension. You can also
save spreadsheet documents in other formats: Excel spreadsheet (*.xls extension),
HTML document (*.htm extension), text file and UNICODE text file (*.txt extension), spreadsheet document v7. (format of the previous 1C:Enterprise versions),
Excel95 spreadsheet (*.xls extension), Excel97 spreadsheet (*.xls extension), Word
document (*.docx extension), Excel2007 sheet (*.xlsx extension), ODF spreadsheet
(*.ods extension).
To do so, select the required file format in the Save As: field.
Appendix 3. Spreadsheet Document Editor
231
NOTE 1
Please note the following limitations when exporting DOCX documents:

When you are outputting the text with a specified orientation, the text is displayed horizontally or vertically depending on the text angle.
When you are outputting a Text-type picture, the text is always displayed with
horizontal orientation.
The text is laid out in the Wrap form only. Other types of text layout are output
in the Wrap form.
If at least one border of the rectangle is displayed, all its borders are displayed.
NOTE 2
When you open an XLSX document in versions of Microsoft Excel below 2007,
the output colors may not match the original colors of the spreadsheet document.
When multiline cell text is output to a spreadsheet document, the contents are
enclosed in double quotes, and double quotes within the multiline string are
replaced with two double quotes.
Saving in Excel spreadsheet format saves the document in the default Microsoft
Office Excel format (equivalent to Excel97 spreadsheet).
Spreadsheets saved as HTML documents may be viewed in any HTML document
viewer, e.g. in Microsoft Internet Explorer. HTML documents are saved in HTML-4
format that preserves most formatting parameters. When converting a spreadsheet
to HTML format, pictures and charts are preserved as well.
3.5. Closing Spreadsheet Documents

You can close a spreadsheet document in the standard manner.
Since spreadsheet documents are mostly used to provide a user with information
(reports), pressing Esc is sufficient to close a document. If a spreadsheet document was
not modified, it is simply closed; otherwise you will be prompted to save the document.
3.6. Viewing Spreadsheet Documents

Navigating in spreadsheets. As in the standard Microsoft Windows interface,
the spreadsheet document window always contains only a part of the spreadsheet
document that is located below this window. Click on any cell in the visible area to
navigate to this cell. The selected cell is activated. Scroll bars are used to display
unseen portions of the spreadsheet on the screen.
For convenient scrolling of a large document, you can press the mouse scroll wheel
and select the scrolling direction with your cursor. The scrolling speed depends on
the distance between the current cursor location and the location where the mouse
232
Managing a spreadsheet view. Use the Table View submenu items to configure
view of various areas and components of a spreadsheet document: column and row
headers, grid, etc.
Let us briefly describe the View menu items. All menu items and buttons work
as radio buttons: when an item is selected (clicked), the corresponding area is
displayed or hidden.
Menu item
Dock the table
Show grid
Show Headers
Show Groups
Edit
Show comments
Black and white view
Page view mode
Scale
Action
Locks the top rows and left columns of a spreadsheet document so that
they will always be displayed when the document is paged through
Toggles display of the spreadsheet grid (thin lines that separate cells)
Manages display of the row and column headers in a spreadsheet document
Shows and hides groups the areas to the left of the row header or
above the column header
Locks or unlocks spreadsheet documents
Toggles display of comments
Toggles display of colors specified for the spreadsheet document. When
this item is selected (checked in the menu), all the colors will be defined
by Microsoft Windows operating system settings
Toggles display of a minimum number of rows (depends on the entered
information), print area, page breaks
Performs a discrete image scale
Image scale. You can discretely scale a spreadsheet document view for your
convenience. Use the Table View Scale submenu to select the image scale:
when this item is selected, a submenu opens for selecting the desired scale for the
spreadsheet document.
Scale can also be changed using the mouse with a scroll wheel. Press and hold Ctrl,
and turn the mouse wheel. Turn the wheel forward to zoom in or backward to zoom
out.
Fixation (headers). In the 1C:Enterprise spreadsheet editor, the top rows and left
columns may be docked so that they are visible on the screen when you scroll
through a spreadsheet document. This is convenient when information is viewed
in large tables. In this case, the column and row headers of a spreadsheet document
will always be visible.
To fix the top rows, select the entire row of the spreadsheet document and select
Table View Lock Table menu item. All the rows above the selected one will be
docked.
To lock a spreadsheet column, select the entire spreadsheet column. All the columns
to the left of the selected one will be docked.
To lock spreadsheet rows and columns simultaneously, select one cell of the
spreadsheet. All the rows and columns to the top and left of the selected cell will be
docked.
233
If a spreadsheet document contains docked rows and/or columns, use the Dock the
Table menu item again to unlock them.
Setting as Read-Only. To prevent editing of a spreadsheet document, use Table
View Change menu item that should be unchecked.
If a cell contains text that does not completely fit in the visible area, hovering the
mouse pointer over the cell will result in displaying the text in a tooltip. If the text
is too large to be displayed in a tooltip, only part of the text will be displayed.
When editing this text, a tooltip will not be shown, as long as you do not move the
mouse pointer.
Scrolling in a spreadsheet document. Use the standard Microsoft Windows
methods to view information in spreadsheet documents. If your mouse has a
scrolling wheel, rotate it to scroll through the spreadsheet contents. Press and hold
Shift for horizontal scrolling.
3.6.1. Names
Names may be assigned to some spreadsheet cells, cell ranges and graphical
objects.
Use the Names dialog to manage names.
To name an element, select it, open the Names dialog using Table Names
Names menu item, enter the name into the text box and click Assign.
Fig. 203. Names dialog
To delete a name, select it from the list and click Delete. Click Select to select the
area corresponding to the selected name. Click Close to close the dialog.
When a row or multiple rows (a column or multiple columns) are selected entirely
and this area is named, when in the Show Named Rows/Columns mode, area names
will be shown at the left (for rows) or in the top (for columns). Internal named areas
are shaded when the Show Named Cells mode is enabled. The name of an area is
displayed in the center of the area.
Spreadsheet document areas that have no user-assigned name are automatically named by the application. These names are not displayed in the Names
dialog. They can be viewed in the properties palette. You cannot assign
234
a name to an area, if this name matches the one generated automatically.

These names look as follows:
R5C7 a cell in row 5, column 7;
R5C7:R8C15 for a rectangular cell range between rows 5 and 8 and columns
7 and 15;
R6 for row 6;
R3:R9 for rows 39;
C2 for the second column;
C11:C20 for a range of columns from 11 to 20;
D12 for a figure where 12 is the sequential number of a graphical object;

T for the entire spreadsheet document.
Area names are unique for each document, i.e., different areas must have different
names. Area names are not case-sensitive.
3.6.2. Cell Text Input

We will consider any combination of characters containing letters, numbers, punctuation marks, spaces, and special characters as text. Numbers in a cell are also
considered to be text.
Text may be entered into any cell of a spreadsheet document. When a document
or a report is formatted, the cell text is processed based on specified cell properties
and is moved to the final report upon processing.
Text may be entered and text attributes specified only in active cells. To activate a
cell, left-click it.
To enter a text into an empty cell, you should simply start typing. The cell will
switch to editing mode; an insertion point (blinking vertical line) will appear in
the cell, and you will see the text being entered into the cell. Press Enter when you
finish typing. Text editing can also be completed by clicking any unselected cell.
This is the same thing as pressing Enter.
If an edited cell contained any text, this text will be replaced with the new text.
If you want to edit text in a cell without replacing it but adding to the already available text instead, press Enter or F2 or double-click the cell before typing the text.
The cell will switch to the editing mode, and you will be able to located the cursor
to any position in the text using the mouse or arrow keys.
Warning!
Note the Shift+Enter keyboard shortcut. Using this shortcut allows you to start a
new text line in a cell without finishing editing the cell. You can also move to a
new line using this shortcut when entering text into the Text field of the property
palette of a cell.
235
Press Esc before leaving the editing mode to cancel all the changes you have made.
If text does not fit into a cell, it will be shown in the neighboring cells of the same
row (depending on the text alignment).
If you want to enter the same text into multiple cells, select these cells and enter the
required text into the Text property. To put the text into cells, click the Save button
on the toolbar of the properties palette. You can also copy the required text into the
clipboard, select any group of cells and paste the text from the clipboard.
Any text angle may be used in cells. Select the cells where text is to be arranged
at an angle and specify the required angle from -360 to 360 in the Orientation
property.
A comment may be created for any cell of a spreadsheet document. A comment
may contain any text that describes the cell. A cell with a comment is marked by a
red triangle in the upper right corner. If the Show Comments mode is enabled, the
text of the comment is always displayed. If this mode is disabled, the comment is
displayed as a tab on mouse-over for a cell.
When you are entering cell values in the Wildcard property, you can specify a wildcard that will define the string entry of symbols.
Editing keys. All the Microsoft Windows keys and keyboard shortcuts can be used
for editing text in spreadsheet document cells.
If you make a mistake when working with a spreadsheet document, you can undo
your actions. The editor has a special feature for this purpose. Use the Edit Undo
menu item to undo last action. You can undo all the actions that you have performed
after opening or creating a spreadsheet document.
Use the Edit Redo menu item to redo the previously undone actions.
3.7. Selecting Cells, Rows, and Columns in a Spreadsheet

All spreadsheet data can be edited in active cells. Some operations may be
performed for a random group of cells or for a cell range (a rectangular group of
cells).
Before performing these operations, the corresponding cell, cell range or a group
of cells in a spreadsheet document must be selected. The column and row numbers
of a selected group are also selected. This selection makes it easier to determine the
group location.
Use the standard Microsoft Windows methods to select an element (cell) or a group
of elements in a spreadsheet document.
Click any cell to remove the selection.
236
3.8. Search and Replace

The 1C:Enterprise spreadsheet editor can be used to search for any sequence of
characters in a spreadsheet document and replace it with any other sequence of
characters.
Search. Use the Edit Find command to perform a search. The search parameters
dialog will open.
Fig. 204. Search in a spreadsheet document
Enter the text that you want to search for into the Find field of the dialog. The search
template string is unlimited.
Check the Match case option to make the search case-sensitive.
Check the Entire cells option to search only for the cells that exactly match the
source text.
There are eight methods for searching a document. Select the option you want in
the Direction group and View list. All the search methods are cyclical.
Use the Direction group to specify the general search direction: Forward move ahead
(right/down) from the current position, Back move back from the current position.
Use View list field to specify the range and order of the search directions:
By columns search the current column; upon reaching the end (or beginning)
of the column, move to the next cell in the general direction; upon reaching the
end (or beginning) of the document, move to the beginning (end);
By rows search current row; upon reaching the end (or beginning) of the row,
move to the next cell in the general direction; upon reaching the end (or beginning) of the document, move to the beginning (end);
In current column search the current column; upon reaching the end (or beginning) of the column, move back to the beginning (end) of the column;
In current row search the current row; upon reaching the end (or beginning) of
the row, move back to the beginning (end) of the row.
Click the Find button after specifying the search parameters. If a cell is found with a
specified sequence of characters, this cell will become the current cell.
You can repeat the search in the Forward direction by selecting Edit Find Next
menu item or by pressing F3.
237
You can repeat the search in the Backward direction by selecting the Edit Find
Previous command or by pressing Shift+F3.
Replace. Use the Change Replace command to replace a string of characters.
The replace parameters dialog will open.
Fig. 205. Replace setup in a spreadsheet document
Actions in the dialog are similar to those used to search for information. Enter the
replacement text into Replace field.
You cannot choose the direction of the replace function. It goes Forward.
Click Find after specifying the find and replace parameters.
If a cell is found with a specified sequence of characters, this cell will become the
current cell.
To replace the located string of characters, click Replace. The string will be
replaced and search will continue.
Click Replace All to replace all the occurrences of the required string.
3.9. Changing Row Height and Column Width

Row height and column width can be resized automatically or manually.
Resizing row height and column width manually. To change row height, move
the mouse cursor over the bottom border of the row header until the cursor changes
to a double vertical arrow. Now the header border can be moved to specify the
required row height.
To change column width, move the mouse cursor over the right border of column
header until the cursor changes to double horizontal arrow. Now the header border
may be dragged to specify the required column width. Double-click the header
border to specify the minimum column width. The editor will analyze text in all the
cells and will select the column width to fit all the texts into the columns.
Column width and row height can be adjusted with your mouse while holding Ctrl
down. Press Ctrl and hover the mouse pointer over the border of any cell in the
required column or row. The cursor will change its shape. Specify the required size.
238
This method is convenient when column and row headers are not displayed (usually
for spreadsheet documents located in forms).
Resizing row height and column width automatically. To modify the width of a
column, select the required column. Then select Table Format Column width. In
the displayed prompt, indicate the required column width and click OK the width
of the column will be adjusted according to the specified value.
Fig. 206. Spreadsheet document editor. Column width
For automatic calculation of row height depending on the text height, check Auto
row height. If Maximum row height is checked, the maximum possible row height is
specified in this field. If the actual row height is less than the specified height, the
row will be displayed with the actual height. If the actual height is greater than the
maximum value, the row height will be set to the maximum value. In this case the
row will be partly invisible. If Maximum row height is unchecked, the row height
will always be set as the actual height.
If Auto row height is unchecked, the Row height field specifies fixed row size.
Automatic column width is set differently from automatic row height. When a new
spreadsheet document is created, all the columns in this document have a standard
width that equals the width of nine symbols of the default spreadsheet font.
The default column width may be adjusted. To do so, highlight the entire spreadsheet document, select Table Format Column Width and enter the new default
column width as a number of characters in the default font. When you click OK, the
width of all the columns will be adjusted to match the new value. When you select
Auto, the column width value for the entire spreadsheet document will be used. If
Auto is specified as column width value for the entire spreadsheet document, all the
columns will have a width of 9.
The column width can be changed using the same procedure used for row height
adjustment.
If cells contain information and you need to set minimum column width or row
height, double-click the column or row separator. The program will determine
maximum height or width of the text and resize the cell so that the entered text fits.
3.10. Moving and Copying Cells

Any cell or range of cells may be moved to a different location in a spreadsheet
document. It is actually the text and formatting attributes of a cell, not the cell itself
that is moved. Cells may also be copied, moving the formatting attributes of the
source cell to other cells in a spreadsheet document.
239
Moving cells. To move a cell or a range of cells:

select a cell or cell range to be moved;
move the mouse over cell border so that the pointer changes into an arrow ;
drag the cells to the new location.
If cells need to be moved to a hidden area of the spreadsheet, move the mouse to
the border of the visible area of the spreadsheet, and it will scroll automatically.
Copying cells. The mouse may also be used to copy cells or cell ranges. The procedure is the same as for moving, the only difference being that you press and hold
Ctrl key while copying the cells.
Using clipboard. The Microsoft Windows clipboard may also be used to move and
copy cells.
Blocks of neighboring cells may also be copied.
You can use the M button on the toolbar to copy to the clipboard (Copy to Clipboard
as Number). This button results in cell contents copied to the clipboard as a number
(if the copied cell contains a number). If a cell range is selected, clicking the M
button will copy the sum of all the numbers in the selected cells to the clipboard.
The cell copy remains in the clipboard until the clipboard is cleared or some other
information replaces it. This feature may be used to create multiple copies of the
same cell. For example, you can copy one cell, select a block of cells and use the
Paste command to paste the contents of the clipboard to every cell in the block. In
this manner several neighboring cells can be copied, however, remember that the
block size (number and order of cells) should be divisible by the size of the copied
cells. Otherwise, a warning will be displayed: Selection does not correspond to
insertable block.
If the Paste Special command is used instead of the Paste command, the following
dialog will be displayed.
Fig. 207. Special Paste setup for a spreadsheet document
Use these options to specify what should be inserted into a spreadsheet: the entire
cell, text only, the cell values, format, outline, comments or names.
240
Use Replace column formats to preserve the original column format (for details, see
"Specifying Varying Column Widths" on the page241), set in the source document.
Enhanced dragging. You can also use the right mouse button to move and copy
cells. This operation is referred to as enhanced dragging. The procedure is the
same as for the left mouse button, the only difference being that when the button is
released, a context menu is displayed.
Fig. 208. Context menu of enhanced dragging
Use this menu to specify the operation: moving, copying or copying with special
paste. The operation can also be cancelled from this menu.
3.11. Adding and Deleting Cells

Adding and removing cells, columns or rows to an existing spreadsheet is often
required.
Adding a row (column). The following steps should be followed to add a row or a
column to a spreadsheet document (new rows are inserted above the selected row,
and new columns are inserted to the left of the selected row):
select the number of rows or columns that you want to insert at the location
where they are to be inserted;
select Table Insert menu item.
Deleting a row (column). To delete a row or a column:
select the rows or columns to be deleted;
select Change Delete menu item.
Selected rows or columns are deleted from spreadsheets with all text that is located
within them. They are replaced with rows below or columns to the right.
Inserting a cell. A new cell may be inserted anywhere in an existing spreadsheet.
To insert a cell:
select a cell at the position where you want to insert a new cell;
select Table Insert menu item;
select where cells will be moved in order to make room for the new cell: Horizontally cells to the right will be moved, or vertically cells below will be moved;
lick OK.
Inserting a range of cells. A range of cells can be inserted into a spreadsheet document if needed.
To insert a range of cells:
select the cell range of the same size and at the same place where you want to
install a new cell range.
241
select Table Insert menu item.

select where to move the cells in order to make room for a new range: horizontally
the cells to the right will be moved, or vertically the cells below will be moved;
click OK.
Deleting a range of cells. To delete a range of cells:

select a range of cells to be deleted;
select Change Delete menu item;
specify what range will replace the deleted range: Horizontally cells to the
right will replace the deleted range, vertically cells below will replace the
deleted range;
click K.
3.12. Split Cells

The 1C:Enterprise spreadsheet editor may be used to split cells in spreadsheets.
To split a cell, highlight it and select the Table Split Cell menu item. This will
display a prompt to choose the split type.
Fig. 209. Selecting a cell split
If you select horizontal splitting, the result will be as shown in the figure below.
Fig. 210. Horizontal cell split
Vertical splitting is performed in the same way.
3.13. Specifying Varying Column Widths

In the 1C:Enterprise spreadsheet editor you may specify a different column width for
different rows. Select one or more rows of a spreadsheet documents as shown below.
Fig. 211. Spreadsheet document editor. Multiple rows selected
242
Place the mouse pointer over the column separator, left-click and drag the separator to the right or left while holding the mouse button down. Release the mouse
button. You will be prompted to confirm the action. The following message will be
displayed: New row format will be created for the selected rows. Click OK. Now the
template will look as follows:
Fig. 212. Spreadsheet document editor. New row format
3.14. Hiding and Showing Rows and Columns

For more convenient viewing, you can hide and show different rows and columns
in a spreadsheet in the 1C:Enterprise spreadsheet editor.
Let us use the currency rate report as an example.
Fig. 213. Currency rate report
As we see from the spreadsheet, the rate did not change for the first 9 days. Therefore, we may hide this information. To do so, we will select the rows from 5 to 13
and use Hide item from the context menu.
243
The report will look as follows:
Fig. 214. Currency rate report. Rows 5 to 13 hidden
Note that the row numbering indicates that there are hidden rows.
To display hidden rows of a spreadsheet document, highlight any area that includes
the hidden elements (in this case we select rows from 4 to 14) and select the Show
command from the context menu.
Select the entire spreadsheet to show all the hidden areas.
3.15. Merge Cells

When a document print form template is created, text must often be entered into an
area that is occupied by several cells (both horizontally or vertically). The merge
feature may be used to arrange text in multiple cells. If multiple cells are merged,
the text is aligned by the borders of the merged cells.
To merge cells, select the required cell range and use the Table Merge menu item.
All the text in the merged cells will be lost except for the text in the upper left cell,
which becomes the text of the merged cell.
To split a merged cell, select it and use the Table Merge command again.
If the merged cell contained text, it will go to top left cell upon merging, notwithstanding formatting conditions (e.g. it could be located in the bottom right corner of the
merged cell having been moved to the right horizontally and to the bottom vertically).
3.16. Working with Named Areas of Spreadsheet

Documents
A name may be assigned to a group of cells in a spreadsheet to manipulate an area
using 1C:Enterprise script tools. It is convenient to use named areas for creating
report templates. Named areas for spreadsheet documents are not important and are
not displayed, as they are in a template.
244
A template is constructed of building blocks that comprise a report. These building

blocks are named areas.
3.16.1. Creating a Named Area

There are horizontal named areas (consisting of selected rows), vertical named
areas (consisting of selected columns) and rectangular named areas (consisting of
neighboring cells).
To create a named area, select the required area and use Table Names Set Name
menu item. In the dialog, specify the name of the area.
3.16.2. Named Area Viewing Mode

Named rows and columns may be viewed when the Table Names Show Named
Rows/Columns mode is enabled.
Area names are shown between the headers and the area itself.
You may view rectangular named areas when the Table Names Show Named
Cells mode is enabled.
Area names are shown in shaded areas. The name is located in the middle of the area.
3.16.3. Deleting a Named Area

To delete a named area, select this area and use the Table Names Remove Name
command.
3.16.4. Resizing Named Areas

If a named area consists of more than one row or column, you can resize it by
selecting rows or columns inside the area and using the Table Insert command.
If an area consists of one row or column, it may not be expanded. The name must
be removed and the named area created again.
To reduce the size of a named area, select the required number of rows or columns
to be deleted and use the Delete command from the context menu.
You can do the same for rectangular areas. If you select individual cells instead of
rows or columns, the area cannot be resized.
3.17. Working with Spreadsheet Document Groups

You can join selected rows or columns together to view spreadsheet data more
conveniently.
Internal or external groups can be created, deleted or expanded (by adding additional rows or columns). Nested or external groups can be created as well.
245
3.17.1. Creating a Group

There are horizontal groups (consisting of marked rows) and vertical groups
(consisting of marked columns).
To create a group, first select the rows or columns and then use the Table Groups
Combine to Group command.
Warning!
You cannot create a group for several sequential cells.
3.17.2. Viewing Groups

Groups may be viewed when the Table View Show Groups mode is enabled.
Groups are shown by markers with thin lines that specify group size.
Fig. 215. Groups in a spreadsheet document
You can manage the grouped rows and columns. There are special markers that you
can use to simplify this process. There are two groups of markers (for levels and for
groups).
Level markers are numbered and located in the upper left corner of the spreadsheet.
Markers are displayed if the header view is enabled (Table View Show Headers/
Footers). The marker with the highest number is used to display all groups. Click
on each previous marker to hide all the groups of the current level. This does not
influence external groups.
246
The group label is placed to the left of the rows or on top of the columns. There are
two states: group is shown and group is hidden (see fig. 215). Use these markers to
manage the view of individual groups. Click on the group marker. The group will
be hidden if it has previously been shown and will be shown if it has previously
been hidden. The appearance of the marker will change.
The row or column that is located near the marker is referred to as the totals row.
You can change the position of the totals row. For horizontal groups, the totals row
may be located at the top or at the bottom of a group. For horizontal groups, the
totals row may be located to the left or right of the group. Use the Total Horizontally
and Total Vertically properties to set the position of the totals row. When the position of the totals row is changed, the group marker position also changes. Totals
row positioning properties are applied to all the groups of a spreadsheet.
3.17.3. Deleting a Group

To delete a group, highlight it (all the rows or columns of the group) and select the
Table Group Remove from Group command.
3.17.4. Resizing Groups. Nested and External Groups

A group may be resized (by adding or removing rows or columns), and nested or
external groups may be created.
Expanding groups. To expand a group:
select rows or columns to be included in a new group;
select Table Groups Combine to Group.
Depending on the position of the selected range and existing group, the editor will
do one of the following:
if the selected area of rows or columns does not cross existing groups, a new
named group will be created;
if the selected area of rows or columns partially coincides with an existing
group, the existing group will be expanded to the selected neighboring rows or
columns;
if the selected area of rows or columns is located inside an existing group, a new
named group within an existing group will be created;
if the selected area of rows or columns completely contains an existing group,
a new external named group will be created, and this group will contain an
existing group.
Reducing groups. To reduce a group:
select the required rows or columns;
select Table Groups Remove from Group.
247
Depending on the position of the selected range and existing group, the editor will
do one of the following:
if the selected area of rows or columns does not overlap existing groups, nothing
will be done;
if the selected area of rows or columns is located within an existing group,
nothing will be done;
if the selected area of rows or columns partially coincides with an existing
group, the selected rows or columns will be removed from the group;
if the selected area of rows or columns completely contains an existing group,
the group will be deleted.
The picture below is an example of nested and external groups.
Fig. 216. Sample nested groups
A first level group Department 07 (an external group) contains two nested groups
for Office 1 and Office 2. These groups are external as related to employee groups.
3.18. Using Graphical Objects

Graphical objects may be used in spreadsheets. They help to improve the document
appearance and make some minor additions to form descriptions without changing
the template structure.
Graphical elements include lines, rectangles, ellipses, texts, pictures, embedded
objects (OLE-objects) and charts.
A Text object in the 1C:Enterprise spreadsheet editor consists of text in a frame.
Below, we will describe working with all the graphical objects except OLE objects.
Graphical object properties are described in detail in sections of the manual referring to these objects.
This section describes ways to place graphical objects into a spreadsheet.
248
3.18.1. Inserting Graphical Objects

Graphical elements can be inserted into a spreadsheet by selecting the Table
Pictures command from the menu using the standard Microsoft Windows procedure.
Use the properties palette to customize graphical objects.
To insert a picture, first select a cell in the spreadsheet document that should be
the location for the upper left corner of the picture, and select Table Pictures
Picture. The picture selection dialog will open.
Fig. 217. Picture selection dialog for insertion into a spreadsheet document
A picture can be selected from a library (from the Library list) or inserted from a
file. To insert a picture from a file, click the Select from file button. A standard file
open dialog will be displayed. You can specify the name of the picture file in this
dialog. If a file name is not specified, a place for a picture will be reserved in the
spreadsheet. Pictures are inserted in their original size.
If a file is selected, you can specify a transparent color for the picture. As a rule,
background color is made transparent so that it does not cover information under
the picture.
The picture is always inserted as is. You can modify the size of the area for picture
placement. To do so, select the Picture object and drag the object border or object
corner in the desired direction. Press and hold the Shift key if you want to preserve
the area aspect ratio.
Use the Picture size property to specify the method of picture placement:
Real size the picture is inserted in its original size. If the actual size is smaller
than the area size, the rest of the area remains empty. If the actual size is larger
than the area size, only part of the picture will be shown.
Stretch the picture is completely fitted into the area, no matter what the picture
size is.
Proportionally the picture is displayed with its original proportions. The
smallest picture dimension that can fit in the area is selected. Another dimen-
249
sion is calculated proportionally to the first dimension, and the picture is placed
in the area.
Tile the picture is always inserted with its original size. If the area is larger
than the original picture, the picture is tiled.
AutoSize if the picture completely fits in the field, it will be displayed in its
original size; if the picture is too large, it will be displayed in a proportional size.
Standard graphical objects (rectangle, oval and text) may be transparent or filled
with different colors. By default, graphical objects in spreadsheets are completely
filled with color. A fill type can be selected in the Pattern property of the
Background category. Background color and pattern color may also be specified.
The Line Style property can be used to specify the line (border) style for inserted
graphical objects and the Line Color property to specify its color.
3.18.2. Linking Graphical Objects

Inserted graphical objects are automatically linked to spreadsheet cells. Objects are
linked by the top left and bottom right corners. When column width or row height
between these corners is changed, the object size also changes.
3.18.3. Selecting and Resizing Graphical Objects

To manipulate a graphical object it must first be selected.
It can be selected in two ways: by direct selecting or using the graphical object
selection mode.
For direct selection, just click on an object. If a rectangle, oval or text is selected,
eight small square marks will appear around it: four in the middle of each side of
object frame and four in the corners.
Any graphical object can also be resized. To do so, use the marks that appear around
the object (or a group of objects) when it is selected. Size may also be adjusted in
the standard Microsoft Windows way.
By holding down the Shift key and dragging the corner mark, the object size will
change proportionally to the current size.
You can also use arrow keys with pressed Shift key to resize an object.
If a line is selected, marks will appear only at the beginning and end of the line.
When the mouse is moved while Shift is held down, only the line length is changed,
without changing its angle.
Use the following method to select multiple graphical objects: select the first object,
press and hold down the Shift key, and select all the remaining objects.
To clear object selection, click any empty area of the spreadsheet document.
In the latter case, graphical objects can be selected by drawing a rectangle with the
mouse. All graphical objects in this rectangular area will be selected. The selection
mode is enabled using the Table Pictures Select Drawing Objects.
250
Select the Table Pictures Select Drawing Objects command again to disable
the graphical object selection mode.
3.18.4. Aligning Groups of Graphical Objects

Graphical objects may be aligned using the Alignment toolbar. Toolbar commands
are available if more than one object is selected.
Align Left aligns the left borders of the selected objects. Left borders are placed
along the same vertical line.
Align Right alignment of the right borders.
Align Top alignment of the top borders.
Align Bottom alignment of the bottom borders.
A selected group of objects may also be centered horizontally or vertically. Use the
Center Align Vertically and Center Align Horizontally commands for this purpose.
The object axis will be aligned.
3.18.5. Setting the Graphical Object Group Size

The Alignment toolbar may be used to set the same size for all the objects
in a group.
An object with marks shown in the fig. 218 is selected as the source. This object
is referred to as the master object. Other objects have markers displayed as black
squares.
Fig. 218. Selecting equal width of objects in a spreadsheet document
Click an object to make it the master object.

Same Width sets the same width for all the objects in a group.
Same Height sets the same height for all the objects in a group.
Same Size sets the same size for all the objects in a group.
251
3.18.6. Moving and Copying Graphical Objects

Any graphical object can be moved within a spreadsheet. You can also copy any
graphical object by creating multiple objects based on a single template object.
Moving graphical objects. To move a graphical object, drag it to the new location.
A dotted border (or line, if you move a line) will help you to place the object in the
spreadsheet.
Graphical objects can also be moved using arrow keys.
Copying graphical objects. To copy a graphical object, drag it to the new location
while holding down the Ctrl key.
If you release the Ctrl key when moving an object, the object will be moved instead
of copying.
Using clipboard. The Microsoft Windows clipboard can also be used to move and
copy graphical objects.
Object (or object group) position is defined as follows: the upper left corner of an
imaginary rectangular frame surrounding inserted objects is placed onto the upper
left corner of an active cell in a spreadsheet.
3.18.7. Changing Graphical Object Order

When several graphical objects are overlapping, it is important to specify their order
to achieve the required effect.
A new graphical object is always placed in the foreground and covers all the objects
behind it. Graphical objects have a layered structure, where every object belongs to
a layer. The top layer contains the object that is always in the foreground. Menu
commands can be used to move an object to the background (bottom layer), to the
foreground (top layer) or to move it one layer up or down.
To move an object, select it and choose one of the commands from Order submenu
in the context menu:
Bring to Front to move the object in front of all the other objects.
Send to Back to move the object to the background.
Move Up to move the selected object one layer up.
Move Down to move the selected object one layer down.
3.18.8. Deleting Graphical Objects

To delete a graphical object, select it and use the Edit Delete command. You can
delete an object by selecting the cell range that contains it. If the entire object is not
selected, it will not be deleted from the spreadsheet, however, its size may change.
3.18.9. Grouping Graphical Objects

You can group several graphical objects into a single group.
252
To group graphical objects, select several objects.
Fig. 219. Selecting multiple graphical objects
Use the Table Pictures Group command.
Fig. 220. Grouped graphical objects
You can work with a new graphical object consisting of several grouped objects as
you would with any regular graphical object.
You may ungroup a composite object if needed. To do so, select a composite
graphical object and use the Table Pictures Ungroup command.
3.18.10. Graphical Object Names

Graphical objects, like spreadsheet cells, can be named. Use the Names dialog to
assign names (Table Names menu item).
In the Designer mode default names are assigned to all the new graphical objects.
Default names consist of the letter D and the sequence number of the graphical object.
3.18.11. Working with Charts

The spreadsheet editor can be used to insert charts into spreadsheet documents.
A chart is a special graphical object used to insert various charts, graphs and
diagrams into documents. You can create a chart using the 1C:Enterprise script
tools (in reports) or by inserting it for spreadsheet data analysis. The section below
will describe how to place a chart in a spreadsheet.
3.18.12. Creating Charts

To create a chart:
select the Table Pictures Chart command;
use your mouse to draw a rectangle of the desired size in the area where you
want to place the chart;

enter the range of cells containing the source data for the chart (you can change
the range at any time).
253
If you first select the cell data range, then you will not need to enter the range in a
prompt displayed when inserting a chart. When a chart is inserted, it automatically
displays the data specified in the selected area.
After creating a chart, you must activate it, for example, by double-clicking it and
customize it using property values in the properties palette.
3.18.13. Chart Data Area

A chart can be configured for a spreadsheet document so that it can use spreadsheet
document data.
Suppose that a spreadsheet document contains data.
Fig. 221. Spreadsheet document. Chart data area
To create a histogram based on this data:

select the area of cells containing the table (marked with a frame in this example);
select the Table Pictures Chart command;
insert the chart.
The spreadsheet document will now contain the chart that displays the data in
graphical form. You can configure the chart appearance, header, area size, chart
colors, and many other parameters, using the properties palette of the chart.
Fig. 222. Spreadsheet document. Inserting a chart
Use the toolbar to customize the chart (Edit Properties in the main menu).
254
3.19. Working with OLE Objects

Microsoft Windows applications normally can use embedded objects, that are also
referred to as OLE objects. An OLE object is a part of the current document that is
created by another Windows application. An OLE object, like any other graphical
object, constitutes an integral part of the document. The only difference is that those
objects are edited in another application, the one where they were initially created.
To create an OLE object:
use the Table Pictures Insert Object command;
use your mouse to draw a rectangle of the desired size in the area where you
want to insert an OLE object;
select the type of an embedded object when prompted.
A Windows application for editing objects of this type will open. The Designer
mode window layout will change the main menu, context menus, and the toolbar
will contain functions and commands specific to the new application.
Warning!
Programs for OLE objects creation are not included in the distribution kit. These
are separately licensed products running under Microsoft Windows. To obtain
help regarding use of the opened application, refer to the documentation supplied
with the application.
edit the OLE object if required.
finish the OLE object editing by clicking anywhere in the spreadsheet work area
outside of the object.

When an OLE object is created, it shares all the properties of standard graphical
objects: you can resize and relocate it, copy it using your mouse or clipboard,
combine with other objects or delete it. For details on these operations, see "Using
graphical objects" on the page 247.
In addition, an OLE object can be modified, i.e. you can change its contents.
Double-click an OLE object to edit it. The Windows application where it has been
created will open, and you will be able to use it to edit the embedded object.
3.20. Working with Spreadsheets in "Template" Mode

Templates (for reports, documents, etc.) are usually prepared during configuration
designing. However, an external spreadsheet (the one stored in a file) can also be
used as a template.
3.21. General Principles of Template Design

Constructing a template consists of "drawing" the constituent parts, i.e. the blocks
that will be used to "assemble" the resulting form. Since nearly all the business
255
documents have a rectangular structure, it is best to create templates for these documents in an editor that supports rectangular elements.
That feature is provided by the 1C:Enterprise spreadsheet editor. In the process of
creating a template you can enter various text into spreadsheet cells; assign formatting parameters both for text and for the entire cells; adjust spreadsheet row heights
and column widths; insert drawing items into the template (lines and boxes, other
graphical objects, including pictures, OLE objects and charts, and various controls).
It I also possible to define the appearance for the entire spreadsheet or for individual
cells or cell groups.
In its final form, the template will be a combination of rectangular areas, each of
which is used to yield some part of the prepared document or report: an area for the
title (name, dates, etc.), an area for headers, one for tabular section, etc.
Fig. 223. Template in a spreadsheet document
You can assign a unique name to every rectangular area of a template so that you
can refer to it later on.
The process of constructing a report based on a template goes as follows:
First, a document or a report is constructed as an empty spreadsheet. Remember
that a template is not directly linked to the finished report. A template is a sort of
a wizard, a certain set of areas for which a report is made by the program module.
When processing a report algorithm from a template, area names are taken in
the required order, translated (variable names are replaced with their values) and
copied to the prepared report. The report generation script permits expansion of
reports both horizontally and vertically.
Another way of constructing a report is when the user enters data in spreadsheet document cells designated for the report and these data are processed by
the program using a formula given in the report spreadsheet document itself.
The results will appear in different cells of the spreadsheet document. Now the
report is ready to be viewed and printed.
256
3.22. Print Setup

We recommended enabling the page view mode (Table View Page View mode)
to view the results of some of the settings described here.
3.23. Headers and Footers

Headers and footers are areas at the top and at the bottom of pages that contain text
that repeats on every page of the document: page number, document name, date
and time of creation, other information.
Use the Table Print Options Headers and Footers... menu item to create a header
or a footer for the document. This command opens a dialog where you specify
whether you want to create the header or footer and to enter the text and style for
headers and footers.
For each header or footer, the starting page, location and font must be specified.
3.24. Pagination
When large spreadsheet documents are printed, the 1C:Enterprise spreadsheet
editor performs automatic document pagination in compliance with page settings.
Automatic pagination takes page breaks and fixed page elements positions into
consideration.
Position settings are not transferred from spreadsheet documents to final documents.
Manual page break. To force page breaks, use the Table Print Options Insert
Page Break command.
To insert a horizontal page break, select a cell or a row in your spreadsheet and
use the Table Print Options Insert Page Break command. A page break will be
added above the selected cell or row. Page breaks are marked with dotted lines.
To remove a page break, select a cell or a row under an existing page break and use
the Table Print Options Remove Page Break command.
To insert a vertical page break, select a column in a spreadsheet and use the Insert
Page Break command. A page break will be added to the left of the selected
column. It will be marked with a dotted line.
To remove a vertical page break, select a column to the left of the page break and
use the Table Print Options Remove Page Break command.
Position on page. The position can be specified for any row or column (or a range
of rows or columns) on page. To do so, select the range and check the Beginning of
page or Keep with Next property of the Paragraph category in the properties palette
(for Cells).
To change the position on a page, reselect this range and uncheck the Beginning of
page or Keep with Next property.
257
3.25. Auto Repetition of Rows and Columns

Repetition may be specified for any row or column in a spreadsheet (or for a range
of rows or columns). To do so, select a row or a range of rows (a column or a range
of columns) and use the Table Print Options Running Area command.
The selected range will be placed on the first page in the same way it is placed in
the spreadsheet, that is, in accordance with its position on the sheet related to the
column and row headers. On the subsequent pages, repeated rows will be located in
the top of every page, while columns will be located on the left of the page.
Repetitions may be removed from each page using the Table Print Options
Remove Repetition command. This setting will be disabled for all the ranges where
it has previously been enabled.
Auto repetition settings for rows and columns are not transferred from spreadsheets
to final documents. You can also view and change repetition areas in the properties
palette for spreadsheets.
3.26. Specify Print Area

Instead of printing an entire spreadsheet, you can use the editor to specify a certain
area for printing.
To specify a print area, select a range of cells in the spreadsheet and use the Table
Set Print Area command.
You can cancel the print area selection using the Table Remove Print Area
command.
For a spreadsheet document, you can also specify the print range in the properties
of the spreadsheets property palette.
3.27. Page Setup

In the page setup mode, you can configure a printing device, specify paper size and
orientation, etc. Use File Page Setup menu item to initiate this mode. This will
display the Page Setup dialog (see fig. 224).
The controls in this dialog operate mostly in a standard manner for many Microsoft
Windows applications. We will describe only some 1C:Enterprise spreadsheet
document editor-specific features.
Copies per page. Copies per page control can be used to specify the number of
copies that will be printed on one page (copies are placed one after another).
If this option is set to Auto, the application will determine the number of copies
automatically: If two copies of a document fit one page with the selected paper
size and page margins, two copies will be printed; otherwise only one copy will be
printed.
258
Fig. 224. Page setup dialog
Headers and Footers. The Headers and Footers group is intended to specify the
dimensions of the page area that will be allocated for headers and footers. The
dimensions are specified in millimeters and are calculated from the top or bottom
margin toward the corresponding edge of the page.
Scale. Use the Scale field to specify the scale for printing a spreadsheet. The specified scale does not influence the viewing scale in the editor.
Fit to page width. If this mode is enabled, the spreadsheet document editor will
automatically scale the spreadsheet in such a way that the width of the document
will fit on one sheet of paper.
Black and white. If this option is checked, all the document colors will be ignored,
and the document will be printed in black and white.
3.28. Printing a Spreadsheet Document

Print preview. The print version of a document may be previewed before printing.
Use the File Print Preview menu item for this purpose.
The Next and Previous buttons may be used to open the next or previous page of
the viewed document, and the 2 Page/1 Page button is intended to toggle between
one-page and two-page view.
Use your mouse or the Maximize and Minimize buttons to change the image scale.
If the mouse pointer is located within the viewed document, click it to increase
the image scale. There are three fixed viewing scales. When you click a document
while viewing it at the largest scale, it will be shown with the smallest scale again.
Click Maximize to increase the scale by one; click Minimize to reduce scale by one.
Click Close to exit the print preview mode.
The document will be displayed with the print options specified in the page setup
dialog. These parameters include paper size, print area borders, scale, etc. The row
and column placement parameters specified in the spreadsheet editor will also be
259
used. These parameters include manual page breaks, row and column repetition,
row and column position on page, etc.
Printing a document. Use the File Print command to print a document.
The standard print setup dialog will open.
In this dialog select the required print parameters (printer, page range, number of
copies) and click OK to proceed to printing.
3.29. Editing Spreadsheet and Cell Properties

Use the properties palette to configure a spreadsheet, cell or group of cells.
Spreadsheet document properties can be used to specify movement direction when
hitting Enter, print area, repeating parts of a document, etc.
Cell or cell group properties can be used to specify the information type, information view and format for a cell, cell dimensions and other parameters.
When a spreadsheet document is opened or created, the property palette displays
the cell properties. To switch to viewing and editing spreadsheet document properties, select Spreadsheet Document at the top row of the properties palette. To view
and edit properties of a cell or a group of cells, pick Cells at the top row of the
properties palette.
3.29.1. Spreadsheet Document Properties

Use the properties palette of the spreadsheet document to configure its properties.
Pick Spreadsheet Document at the top row of the properties palette to view the
spreadsheet document properties.
Template if this option is checked, this document is a template.
Total Horizontally the specified totals column for a horizontal group (see
"Deleting a Named Area").
Total Vertically the specified totals column for a vertical group (see "Deleting a
Named Area").
Picture select a background picture (see "Specifying a Background Picture for a
Sheet" on the page 261).
Fixed background if this option is checked and if you select a background picture,
the background picture does not move when you scroll through a spreadsheet document. Otherwise, the background picture is scrolled with the document.
Move on Enter this property selects the direction for movement when Enter is
pressed. Possible options: No no movement; Down move to a cell under the
current one; Right move to a cell to the right of the current one.
Print area specifies the printable spreadsheet document area (see "Print Area
Definition").
260
Repeating Rows specifies the rows of a spreadsheet document that will be printed
on every new page (see "Print Area Definition").
Repeating Columns specifies the columns of a spreadsheet document that will be
printed on every new page (see "Defining Repeating Rows and Columns").
The appearance of groups and headers may also be configured by selecting the text
and background colors.
If you plan to use the spreadsheet document in the future, use the Save Settings
option to store the view settings for the document (display of headers, grid, groups,
names, fixation position, etc).
The Total Horizontally and Total Vertically options contain the rows and columns
that constitute a logical part of a group, but should remain visible when the group is
minimized.
Let us consider an example with the Total Vertically option (set to Top). The source
data table is shown in the figure below:
Fig. 225. Source data table
When you click the first level marker, the table transforms to:
Fig. 226. First level data
We obtain the totals for a division.

When you click the second level marker, the table transforms to:
Fig. 227. Second level data
261
We obtain the totals for departments.

When you click the third level marker, the table transforms to:
Fig. 228. Spreadsheet document. Third level marker clicked
We obtain the totals for employees.
3.29.2. Specifying a Background Picture for a Sheet

You may use a picture from the picture library or an external file as a background
for a spreadsheet document.
To pick a background picture, click the selection button in the Picture option of the
properties palette.
Fig. 229. Selection button in the picture property
The picture selection window will open:
Fig. 230. Selecting a background picture for a spreadsheet document
Select a picture from the library or from a file. You can make any color of the picture
transparent (remove it). To do so, click Set transparent background. The mouse
pointer will change. Move the mouse over the color you want to make transparent
and left-click it. You can cancel transparency by clicking Clear transparency.
Click OK to apply the background.
262
Fig. 231. Spreadsheet document with applied background
Click the Clear button in the background picture window to remove the background
picture from your spreadsheet document.
Check the Fixed Background option if you do not want the background picture to be
scrolled with the spreadsheet document.
3.29.3. Print Area Definition

If you want to print a part of the spreadsheet document but not the entire document (e.g., a sequence of rows or columns or a group of cells), use the Print Range
property to specify the print area for the spreadsheet.
You may also specify the print area by entering the range, e.g. R5C7:R8C15 for a
rectangular cell range, or R3:R9 for rows 3-9 or D12 for a figure, or by specifying
the area name. If you use the area name, it is automatically replaced with the corresponding range when you enter it.
You may specify the print area in the Range dialog that can be opened by clicking
the selection button in the Print Range option.
Fig. 232. Specifying print area for a spreadsheet document
263
When this dialog is opened, use your mouse or keyboard (see "Names" on the
page 233) to specify the required range and click the Range selection button.
The selected range will be specified in the Print Range option.
You can also specify the print area using menu commands (see "Print Area Definition" on the page257).
3.29.4. Defining Repeating Rows and Columns

When developing a report, remember that spreadsheet documents sometimes do not
fit on a single page. In these cases, it is more convenient if column or row headers of
the spreadsheet document are shown on every page for lengthy or wide spreadsheets.
You may use the 1C:Enterprise spreadsheet editor to configure the view of the
spreadsheet documents. Use the repeating rows and columns definition mechanism
for this purpose.
Use the Repeating Rows option to specify a repeating rows area or the Repeating
columns option to specify a repeating columns area.
For details on specifying a range, see "Print Area Definition".
3.30. Cell Properties

Individual cells or cell groups can be configured in a spreadsheet document.
Use the cell properties palette to configure cells. To view and edit properties of a
cell or a group of cells, pick Cells at the top row of the properties palette.
Editable and viewable properties can be set for all the selected cells in a spreadsheet
document. If an option is changed, the new setting will be applied to the entire
selected area.
3.30.1. Main Property Category

Text the text located in a cell. This property is displayed if the Template category
does not contain the Value property, and the FillType property of the Template
category has the Text or Template value.
Location the Location option specifies how text should be displayed if it does not
fit into a cell (see the table below).
Text location
Auto
Clip
Block
Wrap
Details
Text that does not fit in the width will be displayed in neighboring cells if they do
not contain text
The visible part of the text will be limited by the left and right cell borders
The visible part of the text will be limited by the left and right cell borders; all the
characters in the visible part will be replaced by # symbols. (Used when misinterpretation is possible. Example: a number)
Text that does not fit in the width will be moved to the next lines of the cell
264
Name: the name of the area.

Protection if this option is enabled, the selected cells and pictures are protected
from modification (if Read Only option is enabled for the spreadsheet document).
Hyperlink if this option is checked, the details processing mode turns on when
this cell is clicked. The Selection event handler procedure is called for a spreadsheet document in a form, and if the True option is set for standard processing, the
Detail processing event handler procedure is executed. If the spreadsheet docu-
ment is used independently (e.g. as a report execution result), standard processing

is called (e.g. if a cell contains a reference to the Nomenclature list item, the form
for the item will open). For details, see description of the Detail parameter property
below.
3.30.2. Position Property Category

Horizontal specifies horizontal alignment of text in a spreadsheet document cell.
Left
Right
Center
Justify
Auto
Text is aligned by the left cell border

Text is aligned by the right cell border
Text is placed along a vertical line running through the cell center.
Text is aligned by the left and right cell borders. Cells are automatically configured so
that the text is completely visible
Depends on cell content type. For example, the Left alignment will be selected for rows,
and the Right alignment will be selected for numbers
By selected columns if this option is checked, the text in the leftmost cell of the
selected area will be located in accordance with the selected horizontal position for
the entire selected area. This mode is used to center text in several cells in a row.
Vertical specifies vertical alignment of text in a spreadsheet document cell.
Bottom
Top
Center
Text is aligned by the bottom cell border

Text is aligned by the top cell border
Text is aligned along a horizontal line running through the cell center
Orientation specifies the text angle in a cell (varies from -360 to 360).
Indent indentation from the cell border that was used for text alignment in a cell.
AutoIndent if this option is set to more than 0, indentation will be defined as a
product of the grouping level and property value when groupings are used.
The Indent and AutoIndent are not mutually exclusive.
3.30.3. Appearance Property Category

This properties category is used to configure font (type, size, style, color), negative
number highlighting, background and pattern color, cell borders (border visibility,
line style), etc.
265
Click the selection button to configure border appearance. The line selection dialog
will open.
Fig. 233. Line selection dialog
You can configure a line by selecting its type and thickness.

The dialog contains a sample of the selection.
If you do not need to display the line for the entire length of the side of the cell
area, check Indent. In this case the line will be displayed with the spaces from the
cell edges. For example:
Fig. 234. Low cells border with indent
266
Appendix 4
HTML Document Editor

4.1. Purpose
HTML editor is a tool to create hypertext documents (HTML documents).
4.2. Creating HTML Document

To create an HTML document, select the File New command. When the document type selection dialog opens, select HTML document and click OK. A blank
document window will appear available for editing.
The Edit tab provides the WYSIWYG mode for editing, while the Text tab displays
the HTML-formatted document for editing. The Preview tab renders the document
for you to view the results of your work.
4.3. Saving
You need to save an HTML document into a file to be able to open, edit and view it
in the future. To do so, select the File Save command.
In the file save dialog, select the directory and type in a file name. Click Save.
4.4. Editing
Creating an HTML document is similar to working with a regular text editor.
However there are some differences. For example, you can insert pictures, HTML
tables (later in this chapter we will use the term table), labels and links to other
documents.
4.5. Entering Text

Text input is described in detail in the "Text Editor" paragraph. Here we only
discuss the issues specific to editing an HTML document.
268
4.6. Formatting Text

You can format the HTML document; for example, you can set up your own style
(font, size, italic, indents, alignment etc.).
When you copy a text from other text editors, e.g. from Microsoft Office Word, the
original formatting of the text is retained.
4.7. Inserting and Editing a Table

You can add tables to HTML documents. To do so, select the Table Insert Table
command. A dialog will open for you to enter the number of rows and columns.
If you find out later in the course of editing that the specified number of rows or
columns is not sufficient, more items can be added.
To edit a table (insert or delete rows, columns and cells), use the commands from
the Table menu of the main menu.
Item of the Table Menu
Insert Row
Delete Row
Insert Column
Delete Column
Insert Cell
Delete Cell
Merge Cells
Split Cell
Actions
Adds a new row above the current one
The current row is deleted
A new column is inserted to the right from the current one
The current column is deleted
A new cell is inserted into the table to the left from the current one. All
the cells on the right are shifted
Deletes current cell. All the cells on the right are shifted to the left.
Merges two cells: the current cell and the one to the right from it. The
information entered into these cells is also merged. If you need to merge
more than two cells, repeat this operation as many times as required.
Splits the current cell into two cells
4.8. Inserting a Picture

You can insert pictures into your HTML document.
To insert a picture, select the Element Picture command. A dialog will open for
you to type in the path to the picture file (a path and a file name) or to select a file
in the standard file selection dialog. In the Text field, enter tooltip text that will
be displayed as a floating popup in the view mode when the user hovers a mouse
pointer above the picture.
If required, specify the picture alignment (the way picture is to be located in the
document) in the Position attributes group.
Alignment Option
Not specified
Left
Right
Above the Text
Actions
A picture is in the text
A picture is in a new row and attached to the left border of the document
A picture is in a new row and attached to the right border of the document
A picture is in a text aligned towards the center of the picture
269
Appendix 4. HTML Document Editor

Alignment Option
Bottom
Center
Top
Actions
A picture is in a text aligned towards the bottom of the picture
A picture is in a text aligned towards the center of the picture
A picture is in a text aligned towards the top of the picture
If you want to place a picture in a frame, type in a border width in the Border dialog
box attribute. If the width is not defined or is 0, the border is not displayed.
Click OK to insert the picture.
You can change the attributes specified in the dialog using the picture properties
panel.
You can move this picture. To do so, point to the picture and drag the mouse to the
required location in the document. The Alignment picture property does not change;
for example, if neither Left, nor Right is selected, you can add a picture to the text,
otherwise that picture will be in a new row.
You can copy a picture. You can copy it in a standard manner (using the clipboard
or your mouse with the Ctrl key pressed).
You can place a picture anywhere in HTML document (the text, table or label).
4.9. Label
A label is a special object of an HTML document. It is an area where you can
place some text, table, picture or other labels. When a label is displayed, the nested
objects scroll continuously from right to left.
To insert a label, select the Element Marquee command.
You can resize the label. To do so, select the label and drag the label marker with
your mouse.
You can add labels to a text and a table.
4.10. Links
You can create links for hypertexts in an HTML document.
Select a text or a picture object, and use the Element Link command. The dialog is
displayed to create a link.
Fig. 235. Link creation dialog
Provide the path to a hyperlink or bookmark name in the Address attribute. Click
OK to create the link.
270
You can format the selected object in compliance with the style of the hyperlink.
It is usually a blue underlined text. A picture is placed inside a blue border.
In the view mode when you point your mouse to an object with a link, the pointer
changes its shape to a pointing hand.
4.11. Bookmarks
You can create bookmarks for internal references within the current HTML document.
Select a text or a picture object, and select the Element Bookmark command.
A bookmark creation dialog box will be displayed.
Fig. 236. HTML document. Inserting a bookmark
The selected object is not formatted now.

You can use bookmarks to arrange for an internal reference as follows:
Create a link (see above);
Enter the symbol # and a bookmark name in the Address field after you type in
a hyperlink. Example: v8help://1cv8/PictInfo#Bookmark1.
4.12. Line
Lines can help to visually organize a document.
4.13. Formatting HTML Documents

To format an HTML document, you can use commands of the Formatting and Edit
HTML toolbars.
You can choose your own style and shift the text using the Edit HTML toolbar.
You can use the Formatting toolbar to choose font options, text and background
color, and to set border type and text alignment.
4.14. Editing in HTML Format

The features of the HTML document editor available on the Edit tab are limited. In
the Text tab, the HTML developer can edit the document directly as HTML code.
4.15. Viewing the Results

To view the resulting HTML document, switch to the Preview tab and check the
layout and behavior of the document objects.
Appendix 5
Graphical Schema Editor

A graphical schema is a composition of schema items showing the structure or
relationship of objects. You can use structural charts, business charts, data flow
charts, and object interaction charts for drawing.
Graphical schema consists of a rectangular area of the screen that, in the most
general case, contains various schema items, for example, decorations, connector
lines, or route points.
5.1. Editing a Schema

You can edit a schema in a graphical schema field on a form or in a Graphical
Schema document.
Documents of this type are saved in a file with the .GRS extension.
5.2. Inserting Items into a Graphical Schema

To insert an item, select its type in the Graphical Schema Elements command bar or
use the appropriate command from the menu: Graphical Schema Insert Schema
Items. Next specify a rectangular area to insert the item, or the beginning and end
points if you are inserting a decorative line. After an item is inserted, the insertion
mode is reset as in the form editor.
Every item has a rectangular selection border with markers (small squares in the
corners of the rectangle and in the middle of the sides).
Precise position and size settings can be configured in the Location category of the
properties palette.
Move or resize items using standard Microsoft Windows methods with the mouse
or arrow keys.
You can use the properties palette to configure an item (to set item rules, item
appearance and other item properties).
272
5.2.1. Copying Graphical Schema Items

You can paste new items by copying them from any schema (including a route
map) and from any configuration.
To copy, select a control or a group of controls, copy it to the clipboard and paste it
into the current schema. If an item has a unique name, its name will not be changed.
Otherwise the new item will be assigned a new name.
When you copy an item or a group of items using the clipboard, item names that
can be inserted into any text are also copied.
You can copy an item or a group of items by pressing and holding the Ctrl key
while dragging the item with your mouse.
If you need to copy an image of part or entire graphical schema to the graphical
editor object, select the required items and use the Copy command. If no item was
selected before copying, the entire graphical schema is copied to the clipboard.
5.3. Layout Grid

One simple technique for aligning items is aligning their borders to the marking
grid. The grid consists of horizontal and vertical lines which can be used as landmarks to specify the element position and size in a graphical schema. You can
specify different grid section dimensions, turn the snap to grid feature on and off
and show or hide a grid.
When you create a new schema, the default grid spacing (both vertical and horizontal) is 20 pixels and the grid is displayed in Draw Lines mode.
When items are dragged and dropped, they are always aligned to the top left corner.
If the size of a dragged item is not divisible by the grid spacing, it will not be resized.
You can manage the marking grid in the Edit category of the graphical schema
properties. If the Align to Grid option is enabled for a schema, the item layout is
displayed in dots located at the crosspoints of the grid (you can use the checkered
order display mode for the grid) or in lines (depending on the Grid Mode option).
If the Align to Grid option is enabled, all the items will be automatically arranged
along the layout lines. The size of an item will be determined automatically based
on the grid spacing.
When items are resized (whether with your mouse or keyboard), the edited items
border is always placed along the grid irrespective of the fact of whether or not the
other border is snapped to grid or not.
You can specify the grid spacing size horizontally and vertically. To do so, enter
an integer between 1 and 99 for Grid Horizontal Step or Grid Vertical Step in the
schema properties. Horizontal and vertical values may differ.
The following issues should be considered when selecting grid spacing. With
small grid spacing, items are harder to align, and it takes more steps. However,
Appendix 5. Graphical Schema Editor
273
a large spacing tends to leave large gaps between items, which increase the size
of the schema. We recommend setting a grid spacing of 20 (both vertically and
horizontally) because it successfully combines a reasonable spacing between items
and sufficient precision in sizing.
5.4. Actions on Selected Group of Controls

Some alignment operations, including movement and others, can be applied to a
group of items.
Groups are selected using the mouse in a standard manner.
The location and size of the group is displayed in the status bar just as it would be
for a single schema item.
You can align a group of items or modify its size using special commands.
These include:
alignment management
items distribution
size setting
Uniform settings for groups of items can be specified in the properties palette (i.e.
labels can be displayed with vertical or horizontal alignment, and you can specify
the font size, font color, etc.).
NOTE 1
You can change or set only shared properties of items in a group.

NOTE 2
Group operations are applied to all the selected items except connector lines
(since connector lines are reconstructed automatically, and users cannot manage
the coordinates of their segments).
5.4.1. Managing Alignment and Distribution of Schema Items

Items are aligned using Graphical Schema Alignment from the menu or using the
corresponding buttons of the Align toolbar.
The menu items are available (alignment is applied), whenever more than one
schema item is selected.
Commands
Actions
Align Left
Aligns the left boundaries of the selected items. The items left boundaries
are arranged in a straight line vertically
Align Right
Aligns right boundaries
Align Top
Aligns top boundaries
274
Commands
Actions
ign Bottom
Aligns bottom boundaries
Align Automatically
Automatically aligns an element on the schema
5.4.2. Distributing Schema Items

In order to ensure uniform distribution of a group of schema items, it is convenient
to use commands from the Graphical Schema Distribute submenu.
Command
Actions
Distribute Vertically
Evenly distributes all the items in a group between the top and bottom
one
Distribute Horizontally
Evenly distributes all the items in a group uniformly between the leftmost
and rightmost items
The commands are available whenever two or more schema items are selected.
When you execute a command, border items remain in place and all the other items
are distributed so that the distance between all the selected items is the same. The
items in the middle are distributed without being snapped to the grid, even if snap
to grid mode is enabled.
5.4.3. Setting Sizes

The commands of the Graphical Schema Size submenu are used to set all the
items in a group to identical dimensions. Note that the template used will be the
item marked with white squares. This item is referred to as the master item (the top
item on the figure). Other items have the black squares as their markers.
Fig. 237. Setting sizes for items
The master in a selected control group is changed by clicking another item.

Command
Actions
Same Width
Sets an identical width for all the items in the group
Same Height
Sets an identical height for all the items in the group
Same Size
Sets identical size for all the items in the group
275
The effect of the Same Width command for different item masters is illustrated by
the figure below (in the example 1, the upper item is the master; in the example 2 it
is the lower item).
Fig. 238. Effect of Same Width command
5.4.4. Order of Items

When items overlap, one item completely or partially covers another item.
The Graphical Schema Order menu item is used to set the order of items.
Command
Actions
Move Up
Moves the selected item forward one layer
Move Down
Moves the selected item backward one layer
Bring to Front
Moves the selected item to the front of all other objects
Send to Back
Moves the selected item behind all other objects
These actions are applied both to one item and to a group of items.
5.4.5. Scale
For more convenient viewing of the entire graphical schema, you can use Graphical
Schema Scale (or scroll with your mouse while holding the Ctrl key) to change
scale.
5.4.6. Scrolling a Graphical Schema

For convenient scrolling of a large schema, you can press the mouse scroll wheel
and select the scrolling direction with your cursor. The scrolling speed depends on
the distance between the current cursor location and the location where the mouse
5.4.7. Print and Print Preview

You can print and preview a graphical schema while editing using the File Print or
File Print preview commands. Use the File Page Setup menu item to configure
the print settings, which generally are standard for all the Windows applications.
276
Black and white defines if the graphical schema should be printed and previewed
in black-and-white.
Scale you can use this option to specify the scale mode. Available scale modes:
Auto no rescale (default mode).
By page width proportional scale by page width. If the graphical schema width
(the coordinate of the rightmost item) is larger than the page width, the graphical
schema is proportionally scaled (the X and Y coordinates are proportionally
adjusted) so that the schema width can fit on the page.
Proportionally the proportional scale mode. If the graphical schema height (the
lowest coordinate of the bottom item) or width is greater than the page height or
width, the graphical schema is proportionally scaled (the X and Y coordinates
are proportionally adjusted) so that the entire schema can fit on one page.
5.5. Graphical Schema Properties

The properties of the Appearance category specify the format of the entire graphical
schema.
The Background Color property defines the graphical schema background color.
5.5.2. Edit Property Category

Align to Grid use the grid and snap items to the grid.
Grid Horizontal Step horizontal spacing of the grid.
Grid Vertical Step vertical spacing of the grid.
Draw Grid Mode grid lines view mode (Draw Lines, Draw Points, Draw
Checkerboard, Do Not Draw Grid).
5.6. Graphical Schema Items

This section describes all the graphical schema item types in alphabetical order.
The elements behavior is configured in the properties palette by defining
and selecting values. Some item properties are shared by all or most items.
A complete description of the properties for each item can be found in the manual
"1C:Enterprise 8.2. 1C:Enterprise Script Description".
Shared Graphical Schema Item Properties
There are many properties that are shared by all or most item types. Usually these
properties have a common purpose and are edited in a uniform manner. Below
you will find a description of these properties. For more information on editing
277
the unique properties of some items, see the sections dedicated to individual item
types.
For descriptive convenience, the property settings will be grouped by category as
they are in the properties palette.
Some properties that are described below can be unavailable for specific items.
5.6.1. Main Property Category

Name item name. The tools of the 1C:Enterprise script address graphical schema
items by their names.
Description item description (a multilanguage string that is displayed within an
area containing the item or over the connector line).

You can use the properties of this category to configure route map appearance (text
color, tooltip texts and other parameters).
Background color specifies the color of the item background. The color is selected
from the color palette or from preset styles.
Border Color the color of the border around the item.
Text Color the color of the text in the item.
Font item text font. Defines the type, size, and effects for the font or selects it
from preset styles.
An item (except the connector lines) can contain a picture (Picture property). You
can use the Picture position property to configure the picture position as related to
the main contents of the item. Use the Picture size property to specify the picture
size as related to the item size.
All the items except for the connector lines have the following properties:
Border a frame that surrounds an item.
Transparent background if you enable this property, the item will be displayed
on a transparent background.
5.6.3. Characteristics Property Category

Horizontal position selects horizontal text alignment.
Vertical position selects vertical text alignment.
Tooltip a hint that will be displayed to describe the item purpose.
278
5.6.4. Location Property Category

The properties of this category allow you to position an item in a schema. All the
items except the lines have the following properties:
Left position of the left border of the item.
Top position of the top border of the item.
Width item width.
Height item height.
5.6.5. Decorative Line

The Decorative Line graphical schema item is designed for drawing lines and
arrows and for connecting various items. The Decorative Line item is automatically
redrawn when the relative positions of the items it joins change. The user cannot
intervene in the drawing algorithm, except for manual movement of medial points
on the line. If you reposition medial points manually, they are remembered, and
where possible they are taken into account in subsequent automatic redrawings of
the line.
When the system creates a connector line, it tries to create the shortest path
consisting of vertical and horizontal line sections that do not cross other schema
items.
Medial points of decorative lines can be strictly vertical or strictly horizontal. Bends
on a decorative line are rounded, which permits the directions or intersections of
lines to be retained.
Automatic drawing is used only for the lines that connect two schema items.
The direction of an arrow when a decorative line is inserted is determined by the
ratio of the sides of the rectangle selected when it is inserted: if the height is greater
than the width, the vertical direction is selected, otherwise the horizontal direction
is applied.
You can divide decorative lines into segments without regard for the alignment
grid.

Line type and thickness of the line that is used to draw sections of the Connector
Line item.
Line Color color of the sections of the Connector Line item.
Beginning arrow, ending arrow the arrow style at the beginning and in the end of
the line (no arrow, filled arrow, or open arrow).
279
5.6.7. Characteristics Property Category

Text position position of the text as related to the line; in the first segment, the text
is drawn over the first segment of the line or in the middle of the line (in the middle
of the sum of all the segments of a line).
5.6.8. Decoration
The Decoration graphical schema item is designed to display figures with text and/
or pictures.
The feature of drawing a decoration with the Transparent Background property
enabled is that the graphical schema grid and underlying schema items will be
drawn over it in the transparent areas of the decoration.

Shape the type of the figure being drawn from the predefined types:
No
Block
Folder
File
Right Arrow
Left Arrow
Up Arrow
Down Arrow
Left-right Arrow
Up-down Arrow
Document
Vertical parentheses
Horizontal parentheses
Ellipse
Depending on the figure type selected, the text and picture area changes. For
example, in a decoration with a Right Arrow type figure, the text and picture area is
bounded by the rectangular base of the arrow.
5.6.10. Point of Action

An Action type graphical schema item depicts a point of a business process for
which tasks are assigned and performed.
280
5.6.11. Addressing Property Category

Explanation a string that contains characteristics of the point of action.
Group if this option is set to True, the tasks for this business process point will
be issued to all the group (department) members. Otherwise, one task is assigned to
the entire group, e.g. Sales Department. Only one person will execute this task (the
one who first undertakes it).
Addressing properties the number of these properties equals the number of
addressing attributes for a task selected in the Task property of the current business
process. You can use the properties palette to select one of the predefined values of
the type specified in the addressing attribute of the task (e.g. from the Departments
or Workers lists).
5.6.12. Fork Point

The Fork item of a graphical schema contains a business process point where the
work flow splits into several parallel flows. By default, it is placed on a schema
with three outgoing connecting lines.
Use the Add Outgoing Connector Line command from the context menu to add an
outgoing line to this item. To delete an outgoing line, select it and use the Delete
command from the menu. You cannot delete the only remaining outgoing line.
5.6.13. Condition Point

The Condition graphical schema item is a business process point that has two
possible exit points depending on the logical condition.
By default, Condition item is inserted into a graphical schema with two outgoing
connector lines (from the left side and from the right side). The right branch
includes the Yes comment while the left one is labeled No. You can swap the condition branches. To do so, drag a rectangle at the beginning of the Condition line and
move it to the opposite side of the Condition item.
5.6.14. End Point

The End graphical schema item the end point of a business process.
5.6.15. Start Point

The Start graphical schema item contains a business process start point.
5.6.16. Joining Point

The Join graphical schema item of a route map contains a business process point
where all the parallel paths going out of the Fork point join.
281
5.6.17. Embedded Business Process Point

The Subprocess graphical schema item contains a business process point that
executes an embedded business process.
5.6.18. Processing Point

The Data Processor graphical schema item depicts a business process point to be
performed automatically.
5.6.19. Transition Choice Point

The Transition choice graphical schema item depicts a point of a business process
having several outcomes or options, from which only one is selected. Use the Add
Transition command from the context menu to add a transition. Use the Remove
Transition command from the context menu to delete selected transition. You
cannot move transitions.
By default, the Transition choice item is inserted into a graphical schema with three
transitions. Each transition has an outgoing connector line. You cannot delete this
line, but you can move it to the opposite side of the transition area. When you delete
a transition, its outgoing connector line is also deleted. When you add a transition,
an outgoing connector line is added to it.
5.6.20. Transition Property Category

Name transition name. The transition name is used by the 1C:Enterprise script to
call a transition in the SwitchProcessing handler.
Description transition description (a string that is displayed within the Transition
choice item area).
Background color specifies the color of the item background. This color is used to
fill in the area inside the Transition choice item that contains a transition.
282
Appendix 6
Geographical
Schema Editor
A geographical schema is a set of topographic data that describe geographic
features, and free-form data related to the geographic features, and these data can
be grouped into logical series.
Fig. 239. Geographical schema
A geographical schema can be used independently (in a Geographical schema document) or placed within a spreadsheet document. In the latter case, an area of data
depicted on the geographical schema can be allocated for it in the spreadsheet docu-
284
ment. A geographical schema may also be located within a form. In the latter case,
the source data is customized and prepared during configuration development.
A geographical schema contains geographic objects, which are usually grouped by
type or by several attributes using layers.
Layer a set of geographic objects grouped by some attribute. For example, the
Rivers layer contains objects describing the geometry of rivers in the region, and
the Districts layer contains a description of a citys districts.
Layer object an elementary object describing topological data of a specific
geographic feature. For example, an object can describe the contours of a region.
Objects are divided into the following classes:
Point object represents a feature that can be represented as a point.
For example, cities can be represented as point objects on a large-scale map.
Multipoint object an object that can be represented by multiple points.
For example, cities in a region can be grouped by population, and each such
group represented with such an object.
Polyline object an object that can be represented as a line. For example, such
objects on a map can represent rivers or highways.
Polygonal object an object that defines some area. For example, Vladimir
Region can be represented by a polygonal object on a geographical schema.
Series free-form data grouped by some attribute. An example of such a series
could be annual sales by region.
Series value the value of a data series associated with a specific feature.
For example, for the data series Annual sales by city, the value of the data series
will be the sales for a particular city for a particular year.
Shapefile a file of topological data created using software of the ESRI ArcGIS
family. Can contain data linked to topological features. Each file contains one layer.
A geographical schema permits such files to be read as layers.
Warning!
1C:Enterprise does not provide tools for creating shape files.
A geographical schema consists of a rectangular area of the screen that contains a

plot area, a title, and legends.
The areas can be moved, resized, their properties can be modified, or the areas can
simply be hidden (except the plot area). When a geographical schema is resized, the
areas resize proportionally.
Plot Area contains a coordinate space and depicts data.
Title Area carries an information load and depicts a free-form title.
Legend Area an auxiliary area that depicts the symbol key, helping to understand
the data depicted in the plot area.
Appendix 6. Geographical Schema Editor
285
6.1. Creating a Geographical Schema

To create a geographical schema, select File New from the menu, and in the dialog
that opens, select the document type Geographical schema.
To place a geographical schema in a spreadsheet document, select Table Picture
Geographical schema from the menu.
6.2. Saving a Geographical Schema

To save a geographical schema, select File Save from the menu. In the dialog that
opens, select a directory and specify a name for the file.
Documents of the Geographical schema type are saved in a file with the .GEO
extension.
6.3. Customizing a Geographical Schema

The customization task consists of defining the topologic features to which analyzed
data will be linked, the formats specific to various areas, and their dimensions and
positions.
If a geographical schema is located within a spreadsheet document, you can load
the Geographical schema document existing on disk using the Read command
from the properties palette.
To clear, use the Clear link.
To manage layers of a geographical schema, use the Settings link. The layer settings
window will be displayed.
Fig. 240. Geographical schema. Layer settings
286
Use the buttons on the toolbar to add, edit, and delete layers.
When you add a layer, a layer selection dialog opens first, and then a layer import
parameter window (on the drawing).
In the window, specify the name under which the layer will be imported into the
schema, what data series should be imported and under what name, and how they
will be displayed.
Each topological object on a geographical schema has a special property, Value,
which is designed for storing free-form data, and in the general case, permits easy
identification of features.
In the Layer Import Options window, use the values of some data series to populate
the values of each object. To import values, check Fill Value Property of Layer
Objects and specify the series to import from.
Once you have selected the layers, you can begin customizing them.
Layer settings include:
Text free-form text describing the layer.
Data source organization defines the organization of the data source, if such a
source is used. For details, see the section describing the peculiarities of working
with spreadsheet documents.
Visibility defines the layer visibility on the schema.
Enable selection defines the possibility of interactive selection of objects on
the schema.
Scale Range Beginning defines the beginning of the scale range within which
the layer will be visible on the schema.
Scale Range End defines the end of the scale range within which the layer
will be visible on the schema.
Series settings include:
Text free-form text describing the series.
Format the data display format.
Display Type the series display type. Series values may be:
hidden
displayed as text
displayed as a histogram
displayed as circles whose size depends on the value
displayed as circles whose color depends on the value
displayed as circles whose hue depends on the value
displayed as a pie chart
displayed as a picture
287
Base color the color depending on which the series will be displayed in
Histogram mode, sized-circle, hued-circle, or pie-chart mode.
Text color the color in which text data will be displayed.

Text font the font in which text data will be displayed.
Text orientation the text rotation angle.
Settings for point and multipoint objects:

Object drawing type as marker, specified character, or picture.
Color the color in which the marker or character are displayed.
Marker the marker used.
Font the font in which the character will be displayed.
Symbol the symbol displayed.
Picture the picture displayed.
Base point the point in the picture that will be taken as the origin for display.
Polyline object settings include:
Color the color in which the line will be displayed.
Line type the type of line in which the line will be displayed.
Polygonal object settings include:
Color the fill color.
Border color the color in which the polygons border will be displayed.
6.3.1. Legend Elements Setup

To customize legend elements, select the legend area and click Settings in the properties palette. The following dialog will open:
Fig. 241. Legend element setup in geographical schema
288
You can manage elements using command bar buttons. If you add an element, a list
of layers is displayed first, and after you select a layer, a list of series is displayed.
Select the desired series and specify its settings.
6.3.2. Object Properties

After you have imported layers into a document, you can customize the properties of individual objects. To do so, double-click the object. The object properties
window is displayed.
Fig. 242. Main properties of a geographical schema object
On the Main tab, specify the objects basic properties.

The Data tab contains a list of series, their drawing types, and their identifying
values.
Fig. 243. Data of a geographical schema object
289
The Appearance tab allows you to select the elements formatting.
Fig. 244. Formatting of a Geographical Schema object
6.4. Geographical Schema Properties

Transparent Background sets background transparency.
Background Color sets the background color of the geographical schema.
Scale this property allows you to set the scale mode depending on which data will
be displayed.
Available options:
All Data the data are scaled so they fit entirely within the visible area.
As Scale Defined data are scaled according to scale.
Specified Area only the coordinate-specified area.
Scale the scale for data to be displayed in As Scale Defined mode.
Projection the geographic projection in which the geographical schema will be
displayed.
Latitude Offset the latitudinal amount in degrees by which the coordinate
origin will be offset.
Longitude Offset the longitudinal amount in degrees by which the coordinate
origin will be offset.
Show Coordinates if enabled, the coordinates of the point under the mouse
pointer will be displayed in the status bar. This property is not available for
some projection types.
Left the left border of the specified area. Available if Specified Area scale
mode is selected. Specified in tenths of a degree.
Bottom the bottom edge of the specified area. Available if Specified Area scale
290
Right the right edge of the specified area. Available if Specified Area scale
Top the top edge of the specified area. Available if Specified Area scale mode
is selected. Specified in tenths of a degree.
Title shows or hides the title area. Available if the geographical schema is
located in a spreadsheet document or a form.
Legend shows or hides the legend area. Available if the geographical schema
is located in a spreadsheet or form.
6.4.2. Series Property Category

This category of properties is available if the geographical schema is located in a
spreadsheet. The properties in the category allow you to set the data source for the
layer;
Active Layer specifies the layer for which the data source will be customized.
Content Type specifies the data source organization type.
Two data placement options are possible: in rows and at intersections.
Object 1
Object 2
Object 3
Object 4
Object 5
Data Series 1
Data Series 2
Data Series 3
Data Series 4
Data Series 5
Object 1
Object 2
Object 3
Object 4
Series 1
Value 1
Value 2
Value 3
Value 4
Value 1
Value 2
Value 3
Value 4
Value 5
Series 2
Value 1
Value 2
Value 3
Value 4
Series 3
Value 1
Value 2
Value 3
Value 4
Series 4
Value 1
Value 2
Value 3
Value 4
Data Range the range of data in the spreadsheet document that will be used as a
data source (similar to a chart).
6.5. Geographical Schema Title Properties

These properties are available if the geographical schema is located in a spreadsheet
document.

Text text to display in the title.
Font title text font.
291
Title Color the color of the title text.

Alignment defines the alignment of the title text.
Border the type of border around the title area.
Border Color the color of the border around the title area.
Transparent Background defines the background transparency of the title area.
Background Color the color of the title area background.
6.6. Geographical Schema Legend Properties

These properties are available if the geographical schema is located in a spreadsheet
document.

Font legend text font.
Color the color of the legend text.
Border the type of the border around the legend area.
Border Color the color of the border around the legend area.
Transparent Background defines background transparency of the legend area.
Background Color the color of the legend area background.
Scale Line shows or hides the scale line in the legend area.
Legend Elements the Settings link opens the Legend Elements dialog that is used
to customize the legend elements.
Fig. 245. Legend element setup dialog in geographical schema
Data Series the series of data linked to the legend element. To add a series, click
the Add button on the toolbar, select the layer, and then select the series.
Picture a picture that helps decipher a legend element.
Sample Text text as displayed on the schema.
Sample Font sample text font.
292
Sample Color sample text color.

Label Text the text of an explanatory label.
If a legend element is linked to a data series and the sample text is not specified,
text from the data series will be displayed.
6.7. Text Search and Replace

All the text properties (Text, Format, Label Text, Sample Text, Title) and text values
of the objects support text search and replace (see "Search and Replace" on the
page226).
To view and edit the object values, use the Object Properties command in the
context menu of the geographical schema object.

Enterprise Manual 1c

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Enterprise Manual 1c

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

1:Enterprise 8.

ENTIRE COPYRIGHT TO SOFTWARE

1C, LLC, 19962012

1:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual. Second edition

TECHNICAL SUPPORT LINE

WE ARE ALWAYS HERE TO HELP YOU!

1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

Text Files Included in the 1C:Enterprise8.2 Distribution Kit........................................... 15

Chapter 2. Software Installation and Update.................................................................... 19

2.1.1. Platform Installation................................................................................................ 20

Chapter 3. Getting Started................................................................................................... 25

3.2.1. Web Client Startup.................................................................................................. 26

Chapter 4. Software Interface............................................................................................. 31

1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

4.2.1. Auxiliary Window Navigation................................................................................. 38

Chapter 5. Operation in Forms........................................................................................... 45

5.3.1. Text Box.................................................................................................................. 47

6.1.1. Hierarchical Lists..................................................................................................... 66

Chapter 7. Management of Various Data Types................................................................ 79

7.7.1. Viewing Document Journal..................................................................................... 83

8.3.1. Using Quick Settings............................................................................................... 94

Chapter 9. Editing a Report Variant................................................................................ 105

9.2.1. Customization of Report Structure Item................................................................ 109

Chapter 10. Service Features............................................................................................. 125

10.2.1. Favorites Setup.................................................................................................... 127

1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

10.8. Calculator................................................................................................................... 131

Chapter 14. Slow Connection Mode . ............................................................................... 179

15.2.1. List Customization............................................................................................... 182

Appendix 1. Data Composition System Expression Language....................................... 201

2.4.1. Moving the Cursor................................................................................................. 224

Appendix 3. Spreadsheet Document Editor..................................................................... 229

1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

3.2. Operations with Spreadsheet Documents..................................................................... 230

3.25. Auto Repetition of Rows and Columns...................................................................... 257

1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

5.6. Graphical Schema Items............................................................................................... 276

Structure of the Manual

1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

Chapter 15 describes working with the platform in the "ordinary" application

IMPORtant! information that is important for correct operation of the

What You Need To Know

Books Included in the Documentation

that are common for all 1C:Enterprise applications.

"1C:Enterprise8.2. Developer Guide". Describes how to customize applications

to reflect the accounting procedures in a specific company, as well as how to

Text Files Included in the 1C:Enterprise8.2 Distribution Kit

1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

About 1C:Enterprise8 Page

1C:Enterprise8 Web Site

1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

2.1. Software Installation

1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

Fig. 2. Custom installation menu

2.1.1. Platform Installation

Fig. 3. Installer welcome screen

Chapter 2. Software Installation and Update

Click Next > to proceed with installation.

Fig. 4. Selecting installation of the 1C:Enterprise basic components

1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

Fig. 5. Selecting installation of thin client components for client-server mode

Click Next> to proceed with installation.